Anda di halaman 1dari 498

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset

Management Fundamentals
Volume 1 - Student Guide

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
D49485GC10

n a e
r
Edition 1.0
August 2007

t e U s
D52054

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright 2002, 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and
print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way.
Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display,
perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization
of Oracle.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please
report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not
warranted to be error-free.

Restricted Rights Notice

If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United
States Government, the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS


The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted
by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.

Trademark Notice

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective
owners.

Author

Sudha Seshadri
m y
Technical Contributors and Reviewers
d e
James Michael Amulu, David Nelson, Amy Sonczalla
c a
This book was published using:

e
oracletutor A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Table of Contents

Enterprise Asset Management Overview ......................................................................................................1-1


Enterprise Asset Management Overview ......................................................................................................1-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................1-5
Overview .......................................................................................................................................................1-6
Capital Assets ................................................................................................................................................1-8
Rebuildable Inventory ...................................................................................................................................1-9
Asset Maintenance Goals ..............................................................................................................................1-10
Types of Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................1-11
eAM Capabilities...........................................................................................................................................1-13
eAM Functionality.........................................................................................................................................1-14
Managing Assets............................................................................................................................................1-15
Hierarchy .......................................................................................................................................................1-17
Managing Work.............................................................................................................................................1-18
Executing Work.............................................................................................................................................1-20
Maintenance Budgeting .................................................................................................................................1-22
Planning in eAM............................................................................................................................................1-23
Web-Based User Interface.............................................................................................................................1-24
Capital Asset or Rebuildable Inventory Performance and Forecasting .........................................................1-27
Using eAM for Plants and Facilities..............................................................................................................1-28
Complete Enterprise Integration for your Assets...........................................................................................1-30
eAM Business Flow.......................................................................................................................................1-32
y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................1-34

m
User Roles .....................................................................................................................................................1-35

d e
Support for 21 CFR Part 11 ...........................................................................................................................1-37
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................1-38

c
Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management ........................................................................................2-1 a
Summary........................................................................................................................................................1-39

A
Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management .........................................................................................2-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................2-4

e
c l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-5
eAM Setup Overview ....................................................................................................................................2-6

r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-7
Organization Setup ........................................................................................................................................2-8

O ly
Practice - Creating an Employee ...............................................................................................................2-9
Solution - Creating an Employee...............................................................................................................2-11

& On
Setting Up Organizations...............................................................................................................................2-15

l
Enabling Organizations for eAM...................................................................................................................2-16

a e
Guided Demonstration - Enabling eAM Organizations.............................................................................2-18
Defining eAM Parameters .............................................................................................................................2-20

r n
Practice - Setting Up Organization User Values........................................................................................2-23

s
e
Solution Setting Up Organization User Values ......................................................................................2-25

I n t U
Guided Demonstration - Defining eAM Parameters..................................................................................2-29
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-31
Event Logging ...............................................................................................................................................2-32

e
Areas..............................................................................................................................................................2-34

l
Practice - Defining Areas...........................................................................................................................2-35

c
Solution - Defining Areas..........................................................................................................................2-36

r a
Resources.......................................................................................................................................................2-37
Practice - Defining Resources....................................................................................................................2-38

O Solution - Defining Resources...................................................................................................................2-41


Departments...................................................................................................................................................2-49

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


i
Practice - Defining Departments................................................................................................................2-50
Solution - Defining Departments...............................................................................................................2-52
Department Approvers ..................................................................................................................................2-56
Practice - Defining Department Approvers ...............................................................................................2-57
Solution - Defining Department Approvers...............................................................................................2-58
Miscellaneous Documents .............................................................................................................................2-59
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-60
Lookups .........................................................................................................................................................2-61
Practice - Defining Lookup Codes.............................................................................................................2-64
Solution - Defining Lookup Codes............................................................................................................2-66
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-68
Category Codes and Sets ...............................................................................................................................2-69
Practice - Defining Category Codes and Sets ............................................................................................2-71
Solution - Defining Category Codes and Sets ...........................................................................................2-73
User-Defined Work Order Status ..................................................................................................................2-75
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-76
Asset Groups .................................................................................................................................................2-77
Practice - Defining Asset Groups ..............................................................................................................2-79
Solution - Defining Asset Groups..............................................................................................................2-80
Attributes .......................................................................................................................................................2-82
Practice - Defining Attributes ....................................................................................................................2-84
Solution - Defining Attributes ...................................................................................................................2-86
Asset Numbers...............................................................................................................................................2-91
Practice - Defining Assets .........................................................................................................................2-96
Solution - Defining Assets.........................................................................................................................2-99
Asset Routes ..................................................................................................................................................2-108
Practice - Defining Asset Routes ...............................................................................................................2-110
Solution - Defining Asset Routes ..............................................................................................................2-111
m y
e
Asset Bills of Material...................................................................................................................................2-113

d
Practice - Defining an Asset BOM ............................................................................................................2-115
Solution - Defining an Asset BOM............................................................................................................2-116

c a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-118
Rebuildable Items and Serial Numbers .........................................................................................................2-119

A
Practice - Defining Rebuildable Items.......................................................................................................2-124
Solution - Defining Rebuildable Items ......................................................................................................2-125

e
c l
Practice - Defining Rebuildable Serial Numbers.......................................................................................2-127
Solution - Defining Rebuildable Serial Numbers ......................................................................................2-130

r a
Practice - Viewing Asset Details using the Maintenance Workbench.......................................................2-135
Solution Viewing Asset Details using the Maintenance Workbench......................................................2-136

O ly
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-139
Non-Stock Direct Items .................................................................................................................................2-140

l & On
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-142
Activities........................................................................................................................................................2-143

a e
Practice - Defining Activities ....................................................................................................................2-145

n
Solution - Defining Activities....................................................................................................................2-147

r s
Activity Association ......................................................................................................................................2-152

e
Practice - Associating Assets with Activities ............................................................................................2-156

t U
Solution Associating Assets with Activities ...........................................................................................2-159

I n
Activity Workbench ......................................................................................................................................2-164
Maintenance Routes ......................................................................................................................................2-173

e
Practice - Defining Component Items .......................................................................................................2-175

l
Solution - Defining Component Items.......................................................................................................2-177

c
Practice - Purchase and Receive Component Items...................................................................................2-181

r aSolution Purchase and Receive Component Items .................................................................................2-183


Practice - Defining a Maintenance Route ..................................................................................................2-188

O Solution - Defining a Maintenance Route .................................................................................................2-191


Maintenance Bills of Material .......................................................................................................................2-200

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


ii
Practice - Defining a Maintenance BOM...................................................................................................2-202
Solution - Defining a Maintenance BOM..................................................................................................2-203
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................2-205
Summary........................................................................................................................................................2-206
eAM Collection Plans ......................................................................................................................................3-1
eAM Collection Plans....................................................................................................................................3-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................3-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-5
Overview of eAM Quality .............................................................................................................................3-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-7
Collection Elements.......................................................................................................................................3-8
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-11
Quality Collection Plans................................................................................................................................3-12
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-15
Collection Plan Attachments .........................................................................................................................3-16
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-18
Triggering Work ............................................................................................................................................3-19
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-22
Entering Quality Results................................................................................................................................3-23
Practice - Setting Up Collection Plans.......................................................................................................3-25
Solution - Setting Up Collection Plans ......................................................................................................3-28
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-34
Summary........................................................................................................................................................3-35
eAM Work Management ................................................................................................................................4-1
eAM Work Management ...............................................................................................................................4-3

m y
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................4-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-5

e
Overview of eAM Work Management ..........................................................................................................4-6

d
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-8
Work Requests...............................................................................................................................................4-9

c a
Life Cycle of a Work Request .......................................................................................................................4-11
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-13

A
Overview of eAM Work Orders ....................................................................................................................4-14
Work Order Status Lifecycle .........................................................................................................................4-15

e
c l
Release Approval Process..............................................................................................................................4-17
eAM Work Orders .........................................................................................................................................4-18

r a
Routine Work Orders.....................................................................................................................................4-19
Practice - Defining Meters.........................................................................................................................4-26

O ly
Solution - Defining Meters ........................................................................................................................4-28
Practice - Entering Routine Work Orders..................................................................................................4-30

l & On
Solution - Entering Routine Work Orders .................................................................................................4-33
Preventive Maintenance Work Orders...........................................................................................................4-45

n a e
Rebuild Work Orders.....................................................................................................................................4-47
Defining Work Order Documents .................................................................................................................4-53

r s
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-54

e
Operations and Tasks.....................................................................................................................................4-55

t U
Material Requirements ..................................................................................................................................4-59

I n
Resource Requirements .................................................................................................................................4-63
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-68

e
Work Order Relationships .............................................................................................................................4-69

l
Practice - Using the Scheduler Workbench ...............................................................................................4-71

c
Solution Using the Scheduler Workbench..............................................................................................4-73

r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-81
Work Order Transactions ..............................................................................................................................4-82

O Transacting Material......................................................................................................................................4-83
Material Transaction Accounting ..................................................................................................................4-84

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


iii
Practice - Transacting Material..................................................................................................................4-85
Solution - Transacting Material .................................................................................................................4-87
Transacting Resources...................................................................................................................................4-93
Resource Transaction Accounting .................................................................................................................4-95
Practice - Transacting Resources...............................................................................................................4-97
Solution - Transacting Resources ..............................................................................................................4-98
eAM Work Completion Transactions............................................................................................................4-99
Operation Completion ...................................................................................................................................4-100
Practice - Completing Operations..............................................................................................................4-102
Solution - Completing Operations .............................................................................................................4-104
Work Order Completion ................................................................................................................................4-109
Practice - Completing Work Orders ..........................................................................................................4-115
Solution - Completing Work Orders..........................................................................................................4-117
Closing Work Orders.....................................................................................................................................4-123
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-125
Using the Maintenance Workbench...............................................................................................................4-126
Practice - Using the Maintenance Workbench...........................................................................................4-130
Solution - Using the Maintenance Workbench ..........................................................................................4-132
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-137
Summary........................................................................................................................................................4-138
eAM Preventive Maintenance ........................................................................................................................5-1
eAM Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................................................................5-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................5-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-5
Overview .......................................................................................................................................................5-6

y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-7
Meters ............................................................................................................................................................5-8
Defining Meters.............................................................................................................................................5-9
m
Associating Meters with Capital Assets and Rebuildable Inventory .............................................................5-14
d e
Using Meter Hierarchy ..................................................................................................................................5-13

c a
Entering Meter Readings ...............................................................................................................................5-16
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-18

A
Preventive Maintenance (PM) Scheduling ....................................................................................................5-19
Defining Set Names.......................................................................................................................................5-20

e
Scheduling Types of PM Sets........................................................................................................................5-22

l
Entering PM Scheduling Definitions.............................................................................................................5-24

c
Entering Major PM Scheduling Options .......................................................................................................5-32

r a
Entering Base Date and Base Meter ..............................................................................................................5-34
Entering Multiple Activity PM......................................................................................................................5-36

O ly
Example: Schedule Based On........................................................................................................................5-37
Example.........................................................................................................................................................5-38

l & On
Defining Suppression Activities ....................................................................................................................5-39
Practice - Entering PM Scheduling Definitions.........................................................................................5-41

n a e
Solution - Entering PM Scheduling Definitions ........................................................................................5-44
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-56

t e r U s
Generating Work Orders ...............................................................................................................................5-57
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-59

n
Summary........................................................................................................................................................5-60

e I
Failure Analysis ...............................................................................................................................................6-1
Failure Analysis.............................................................................................................................................6-3

c l
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................6-4
Overview of Failure Analysis........................................................................................................................6-5

r a
Setting Up Failure Analysis Codes................................................................................................................6-6
Collecting Failure Information ......................................................................................................................6-8

O Analyzing Failure Information ......................................................................................................................6-9


Practice - Failure Analysis.........................................................................................................................6-12

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


iv
Solution - Defining Failure Codes .............................................................................................................6-13
Summary........................................................................................................................................................6-15
Asset Operation Management ........................................................................................................................7-1
Asset Operation Management........................................................................................................................7-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................7-4
Overview of Asset Operation Management...................................................................................................7-5
Tracking Asset Operational Statuses .............................................................................................................7-6
Setting Up Event and Operational Logging for Using Asset Operation Management ..................................7-8
Checking In and Checking Out Assets ..........................................................................................................7-10
Logging Asset Operations .............................................................................................................................7-11
Viewing Asset Operations .............................................................................................................................7-12
Practice - Asset Operation Management....................................................................................................7-13
Solution - Defining Asset Operations........................................................................................................7-15
Purging Event Log.........................................................................................................................................7-20
Summary........................................................................................................................................................7-21
eAM Planning and Scheduling .......................................................................................................................8-1
eAM Planning and Scheduling ......................................................................................................................8-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................8-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................8-5
Overview of eAM Planning and Scheduling .................................................................................................8-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................8-7
eAM Planning................................................................................................................................................8-8
Material Requirements Planning ...................................................................................................................8-9
Defining a Master Demand Schedule Name..................................................................................................8-10
Defining MRP Names ...................................................................................................................................8-11
Defining Plan Options ...................................................................................................................................8-13
Launching the MRP Planning Process...........................................................................................................8-15
m y
e
Viewing Suggested Demand..........................................................................................................................8-17

d
Guided Demonstration - Setting Up Material Planning Parameters ..........................................................8-19
Guided Demonstration - Creating a Master Demand Schedule .................................................................8-20
Practice - Performing MRP for eAM Work Orders...................................................................................8-21

c
Solution - Performing MRP for eAM Work Orders ..................................................................................8-23 a
A
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................8-28
eAM Scheduling ............................................................................................................................................8-29

e
c l
Defining Scheduling Rules for Work Order Relationships ...........................................................................8-31
Using the Scheduler Workbench ...................................................................................................................8-32

r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................8-34
Summary........................................................................................................................................................8-35

O ly
Direct Item Procurement for eAM Work Orders.........................................................................................9-1
Direct Item Procurement for eAM Work Orders...........................................................................................9-3

l & On
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................9-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-5

n a e
Overview of Direct Item Procurement...........................................................................................................9-6
Demo - Enabling Direct Item Procurement ...............................................................................................9-10

t e r U s
Entering Requisitions for Direct Items ..........................................................................................................9-12
Entering Non-Stock Direct Items ..................................................................................................................9-18

I n
Creating Purchase Orders ..............................................................................................................................9-19
Practice - Creating Purchase Orders ..........................................................................................................9-22
Solution Creating Purchase Orders.........................................................................................................9-25

l e
Practice - Entering Orders for Direct Items ...............................................................................................9-32

c
Solution Entering Orders for Direct Items..............................................................................................9-34

r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-42
Accounting Entries Created...........................................................................................................................9-43

O Summary........................................................................................................................................................9-45
eAM Cost Management...................................................................................................................................10-1

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


v
eAM Cost Management.................................................................................................................................10-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................10-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-5
Overview .......................................................................................................................................................10-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-7
eAM Costing Methods and Mappings ...........................................................................................................10-8
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-10
Cost Management Setup................................................................................................................................10-11
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-13
eAM Cost Estimation Lifecycle ....................................................................................................................10-14
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-16
Viewing Cost Information .............................................................................................................................10-17
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-20
Cost Rollups ..................................................................................................................................................10-21
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-23
Transferring Invoice Variances to Maintenance Work Orders ......................................................................10-24
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................10-26
Summary........................................................................................................................................................10-27
eAM Contractor Services................................................................................................................................11-1
eAM Contractor Services ..............................................................................................................................11-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................11-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-5
eAM Contractor Services ..............................................................................................................................11-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-8
Setting up Outside Service Processing ..........................................................................................................11-9
Practice - Setting Up Outside Service Processing .....................................................................................11-13
Solution Setting up Outside Service Processing .....................................................................................11-15

m y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-22

d e
Summary........................................................................................................................................................11-23
eAM Property Manager ..................................................................................................................................12-1

c a
eAM Property Manager .................................................................................................................................12-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................12-4

A
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................12-5
eAM Property Manager .................................................................................................................................12-6

e
c l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................12-7
Setting Up the Integration..............................................................................................................................12-8

r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................12-10
Property Manager Integration........................................................................................................................12-11

O ly
Guided Demonstration - Viewing the Property Manager Integration........................................................12-14
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................12-16

l & On
Summary........................................................................................................................................................12-17
eAM Service .....................................................................................................................................................13-1

n a e
eAM Service..................................................................................................................................................13-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................13-4

t e r U s
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-5
Oracle Service Integration Overview ............................................................................................................13-6

I n
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-7
Setting up eAM Service.................................................................................................................................13-8
Creating Maintenance Service Request Types ..............................................................................................13-10

l e
Enabling Service Requests for Capital Assets and Rebuildable Inventory....................................................13-11

c
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-12

r a
Creating Service Requests .............................................................................................................................13-13
Enabling eAM Specific Fields.......................................................................................................................13-15

O Practice - Setting Up eAM Service............................................................................................................13-17


Solution Setting up eAM Service ...........................................................................................................13-19

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


vi
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-22
Service Requests and eAM Work Orders ......................................................................................................13-23
Summary........................................................................................................................................................13-26
eAM Process and Discrete Manufacturing....................................................................................................14-1
eAM Process and Discrete Manufacturing ....................................................................................................14-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................14-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-5
eAM Process and Discrete Manufacturing ....................................................................................................14-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-7
Organization Setup ........................................................................................................................................14-8
Guided Demonstration - Associating a Process or Discrete Manufacturing Organization with an eAM
Organization ..............................................................................................................................................14-9
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-10
Associating Assets with Production Equipment ............................................................................................14-11
Guided Demonstration - Associating Assets with Production Equipment.................................................14-13
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-15
Viewing Resource Usage...............................................................................................................................14-16
Guided Demonstration - Viewing Resource Usage ...................................................................................14-18
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-22
Generating Production Equipment Downtime...............................................................................................14-23
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-25
Summary........................................................................................................................................................14-26
eAM Project Manufacturing ..........................................................................................................................15-1
eAM Project Manufacturing ..........................................................................................................................15-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................15-4

eAM Project Manufacturing ..........................................................................................................................15-6


m y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-5

e
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-8

d
Defining a Project..........................................................................................................................................15-9
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-11

Guided Demonstration - Associating a Work Order with a Project...........................................................15-13


c a
Associating a Work Order with a Project ......................................................................................................15-12

A
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-14
Creating Requisitions or Purchase Orders .....................................................................................................15-15

e
c l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-19
Updating the Commitments for a Project ......................................................................................................15-20

r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-22
Summary........................................................................................................................................................15-23

O ly
eAM Work Order Billing and Capitalization ...............................................................................................16-1
eAM Work Order Billing and Capitalization.................................................................................................16-3

l & On
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................16-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-5

n a e
Work Order Billing........................................................................................................................................16-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-7

t e r U s
Setting Up Parameters ...................................................................................................................................16-8
Setting Up Item Costs and Prices ..................................................................................................................16-9

I n
Service Attribute Setup..................................................................................................................................16-11
Creating Billable Items ..................................................................................................................................16-12
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-15

l e
Creating a Work Order ..................................................................................................................................16-16

c
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-18

r a
Associating Items/Activities to a Price List...................................................................................................16-19
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-20

O Initiating Work Order Billing ........................................................................................................................16-21


Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-24

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


vii
Creating an Invoice........................................................................................................................................16-25
Practice - Creating Billable Items ..............................................................................................................16-27
Solution Creating Billable Items.............................................................................................................16-31
Practice - Billing By Activity ....................................................................................................................16-41
Solution Billing by Activity.....................................................................................................................16-44
Capitalizing Work Order ...............................................................................................................................16-53
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-55
Summary........................................................................................................................................................16-56
eAM Oracle Time and Labor .........................................................................................................................17-1
eAM Oracle Time and Labor.........................................................................................................................17-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................17-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................17-5
Oracle Time and Labor..................................................................................................................................17-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................17-7
Setting Up the Integration..............................................................................................................................17-8
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................17-10
Time and Expenses........................................................................................................................................17-11
Entering Timecard Information .....................................................................................................................17-12
Extracting Information to eAM .....................................................................................................................17-13
Executing the Cost Manager Process.............................................................................................................17-15
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................17-17
Summary........................................................................................................................................................17-18
Self-Service Work Requests............................................................................................................................18-1
Self-Service Work Requests ..........................................................................................................................18-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................18-4

Overview of Work Requests..........................................................................................................................18-6


m y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-5

e
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-8

d
Life Cycle of a Work Request .......................................................................................................................18-9
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-11

c a
Obtaining Work Request Information ...........................................................................................................18-12
Practice - Obtaining Work Request Information .......................................................................................18-14

A
Solution Obtaining Work Request Information ......................................................................................18-15
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-17

e
c l
Creating Work Requests ................................................................................................................................18-18
Practice - Creating Work Requests............................................................................................................18-20

r a
Solution - Creating Work Requests ...........................................................................................................18-21
Updating Work Requests...............................................................................................................................18-23

O ly
Summary........................................................................................................................................................18-25
Maintenance User Workbench .......................................................................................................................19-1

l & On
Maintenance User Workbench ......................................................................................................................19-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................19-4

n a e
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................19-5
Maintenance User Workbench ......................................................................................................................19-6

t e r U s
Maintenance Supervisor Workbench.............................................................................................................19-8
Viewing and Managing Your Work ..............................................................................................................19-9

I n
Viewing Your Work ......................................................................................................................................19-10
Viewing Work Order Details.........................................................................................................................19-11
Updating Resources.......................................................................................................................................19-13

l e
Updating Collection Plans .............................................................................................................................19-15

c
Requests.........................................................................................................................................................19-16

r a
Purchasing .....................................................................................................................................................19-17
Work Relationships .......................................................................................................................................19-18

O Summary........................................................................................................................................................19-19
Maintenance Super User.................................................................................................................................20-1

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


viii
Maintenance Super User................................................................................................................................20-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................20-4
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-5
Overview of Maintenance Super User...........................................................................................................20-6
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-8
Home .............................................................................................................................................................20-9
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-11
Assets.............................................................................................................................................................20-12
Capital Asset/Rebuildable Inventory Details.................................................................................................20-14
Hierarchy Facility Example...........................................................................................................................20-17
Asset Quality Information .............................................................................................................................20-18
Configuration History....................................................................................................................................20-20
Associated Work Requests ............................................................................................................................20-22
Cost Information............................................................................................................................................20-24
Meter Readings..............................................................................................................................................20-27
Demo - Navigating Maintenance Super User ............................................................................................20-29
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-31
Work Requests...............................................................................................................................................20-32
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-33
Work Orders ..................................................................................................................................................20-34
Work Order Details .......................................................................................................................................20-35
Resource Charging ........................................................................................................................................20-37
Handovers......................................................................................................................................................20-39
Operation Dependencies................................................................................................................................20-41
Accessing iProcurement ................................................................................................................................20-42
Operation Completions..................................................................................................................................20-43
Material Transactions ....................................................................................................................................20-45
Resource Transactions...................................................................................................................................20-49
m y
e
Quality Collection Plans................................................................................................................................20-51

d
Requests.........................................................................................................................................................20-53
Purchasing Information .................................................................................................................................20-54

c a
Work Relationships .......................................................................................................................................20-55
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-57

A
Work Plan......................................................................................................................................................20-58
Managing Operations ....................................................................................................................................20-59

e
c l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-61
Stores .............................................................................................................................................................20-62

r a
Summary........................................................................................................................................................20-67
Stores ................................................................................................................................................................21-1

O ly
Stores .............................................................................................................................................................21-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................21-4

l & On
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................21-5
Stores .............................................................................................................................................................21-6

n a e
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................21-7
Stores Processes.............................................................................................................................................21-8

t e r U s
Practice - Material Issue Request and Verification....................................................................................21-12
Solution Material Issue Request and Verification ..................................................................................21-14

n
Practice - Returning Material To Inventory...............................................................................................21-18

I
Solution Returning Material to Inventory...............................................................................................21-19
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................21-21

e
c l
Summary........................................................................................................................................................21-22
eAM Reports and Processes............................................................................................................................22-1

r a
eAM Reports and Processes ..........................................................................................................................22-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................22-4

O Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................22-5
eAM Reports .................................................................................................................................................22-6

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


ix
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................22-9
Summary........................................................................................................................................................22-10

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


x
Preface
Profile
Before You Begin This Course

Thorough knowledge of Oracle Inventory

Working experience with Oracle Bills of Material

Working experience with Oracle Engineering

Working experience with Oracle Cost Management

Working experience with Oracle Work in Process

Working experience with Oracle Planning and Scheduling

Working experience with Oracle Quality

Prerequisites

There are no prerequisites for this course.


m y
How This Course Is Organized
d e
ca
This is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on exercises. Online demonstrations
and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills introduced.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xi
Related Publications
Oracle Publications
Title Part Number
Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Users Guide
Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Implementation Guide
Oracle Inventory Users Guide
Oracle Bills of Material Users Guide
Oracle Cost Management Users Guide
Oracle Engineering Users Guide
Oracle Work in Process Users Guide
Oracle Quality Users Guide

Additional Publications

System release bulletins

Installation and users guides

m y
Read-me files

d e
International Oracle Users Group (IOUG) articles

c a
Oracle Magazine

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xii
Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions in Text
Convention Element Example
Bold italic Glossary term (if The algorithm inserts the new key.
there is a glossary)
Caps and Buttons, Click the Executable button.
lowercase check boxes, Select the Cant Delete Card check box.
triggers, Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to the ORD block.
windows Open the Master Schedule window.
Courier new, Code output, Code output: debug.set (I, 300);
case sensitive directory names, Directory: bin (DOS), $FMHOME (UNIX)
(default is filenames, Filename: Locate the init.ora file.
lowercase) passwords, Password: User tiger as your password.
pathnames, Pathname: Open c:\my_docs\projects
URLs, URL: Go to http://www.oracle.com
user input,
User input: Enter 300
usernames
Username: Log on as scott
Initial cap Graphics labels Customer address (but Oracle Payables)
(unless the term is a

Italic
proper noun)
Emphasized words Do not save changes to the database.
m y
and phrases,
titles of books and Reference Manual.
d e
For further information, see Oracle7 Server SQL Language

courses,
variables
Enter user_id@us.oracle.com, where user_id is the
name of the user.
ca
Quotation
marks
Interface elements
with long names A
Select Include a reusable module component and click Finish.

e
that have only
initial caps;
c l
This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3, Working with
Objects.
lesson and chapter
titles in cross-
r a
Uppercase
references
SQL column O ly Use the SELECT command to view information stored in the
names, commands,
l
functions, schemas,& On LAST_NAME
column of the EMP table.
table names

n a e
Arrow
Brackets
Commas
Menu paths
Key names

t e r
Key sequences
U s Select File > Save.
Press [Enter].
Press and release keys one at a time:

Plus signs I n
Key combinations
[Alternate], [F], [D]
Press and hold these keys simultaneously: [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xiii
Typographic Conventions in Code
Convention Element Example
Caps and Oracle Forms When-Validate-Item
lowercase triggers
Lowercase Column names, SELECT last_name
table names FROM s_emp;

Passwords DROP USER scott


IDENTIFIED BY tiger;
PL/SQL objects OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER
(OG_GET_LAYER (prod_pie_layer))

Lowercase Syntax variables CREATE ROLE role


italic
Uppercase SQL commands and SELECT userid
functions FROM emp;

Typographic Conventions in Oracle Application Navigation Paths


This course uses simplified navigation paths, such as the following example, to direct you
through Oracle Applications.

(N) Invoice > Entry > Invoice Batches Summary (M) Query > Find (B) Approve
m y
This simplified path translates to the following:
d e
1. (N) From the Navigator window, select Invoice then Entry then Invoice Batches
ca
Summary.

e A
2.
l
(M) From the menu, select Query then Find.

c
3. (B) Click the Approve button.
r a
Notations:
O ly
(N) = Navigator
l & On
(M) = Menu
n a e
(T) = Tab
t e r U s
(B) = Button
I n
l e
(I) = Icon

c
r a (H) = Hyperlink

O (ST) = Sub Tab

Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xiv
Typographical Conventions in Oracle Application Help System Paths
This course uses a navigation path convention to represent actions you perform to find
pertinent information in the Oracle Applications Help System.

The following help navigation path, for example

(Help) General Ledger > Journals > Enter Journals

represents the following sequence of actions:

1. In the navigation frame of the help system window, expand the General Ledger entry.

2. Under the General Ledger entry, expand Journals.

3. Under Journals, select Enter Journals.

4. Review the Enter Journals topic that appears in the document frame of the help system
window.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xv
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle, 2007. All rights reserved.

R12 Oracle Enterprise Asset Management Fundamentals Ed 1 Table of Contents


xvi
Enterprise Asset
Management Overview
Chapter 1

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 2
Enterprise Asset Management Overview

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 4
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 5
Overview

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Asset Management
Oracle Enterprise Asset Management (eAM) is part of Oracles E-Business Suite and addresses

r a
the comprehensive and routine asset maintenance requirements of asset intensive
organizations. Using eAM, organizations can efficiently maintain both assets, such as vehicles,
O ly
cranes and HVAC systems, as well as rotable inventory items, such as motors and engines. To

l & On
measure performance and optimize maintenance operations, all maintenance costs and work
history are tracked at the asset level.

a e
eAM helps companies track, depreciate, and maintain their fixed assets. eAM enables asset-
n
r s
intensive companies to adopt maintenance strategies that optimize capacity and increase

e
utilization, while lowering unit production costs. It improves operation performance and
t U
enhances safety through preventive, scheduled maintenance.

I n
Oracle eAM provides organizations with the tools to create and implement maintenance

c l e
procedures for both assets and rebuildable inventory items. Maintenance procedures are an
integral part of an organizations complete asset lifecycle management strategy, enabling an

r a
organization to optimize asset utilization. eAM enables users to optimally plan and schedule
maintenance activities with minimal disruption to an organizations operations or production.

O Importantly, it improves resource efficiency, enhances maintenance quality, tracks work


history, and records all maintenance costs.
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 6
Oracle eAM tracks the performance of assets (including rebuildable, inventory items) using
meters, quality plans, and condition monitoring systems. By effectively monitoring an assets
operating condition, effective preventive maintenance strategies can be implemented. In
addition to creating preventive maintenance schedules, users can create alternative
maintenance strategies for seasonal or production capacity changes. eAMs comprehensive
maintenance functionality supports asset lifecycle strategies for asset intensive industries,
including Metals/Mining, Manufacturing, Pulp/Paper, Petrochemicals, Facilities, and
Education. eAM eliminates the need for spreadsheets and disparate data repositories, by
enabling companies to manage reactive, planned, preventive maintenance, and adopt a
centralized, proactive strategy for managing asset maintenance across an enterprise.
eAM enables an organization to do the following:
Create a preventive maintenance strategy
Maximize resource availability, including both equipment and labor
Optimize scheduling and resource efficiency
Integrate with Oracles E-Business Suite for enterprise-wide solutions
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Asset Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 7
Capital Assets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Capital Assets

c l
A capital asset is an item of economic value owned by a corporation, held for business use, and

r a
not expected to be converted to cash in the current or upcoming fiscal year. For example,
capital assets can be manufacturing equipment, real estate, furniture, and buildings.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 8
Rebuildable Inventory

m y
d e
ca
e A
Rebuildable Inventory

c l
Rebuildable items are items that can be installed, removed, and refurbished. Rebuildable items
can be serialized or non-serialized.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 9
Asset Maintenance Goals

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 10
Types of Maintenance

m y
d e
ca
e A
Types of Maintenance
Reactive
c l
r a
Small organizations that do not have have Maintenance Planners practice reactive

O ly
maintenance. As equipment fails, Work Orders are generated and crews are assigned. Materials
when in short supply and ordered as needed cause delays in response time. There is little or no
preventive maintenance.
Preventive
l & On
n a e
Organizations that practice preventive maintenance place a high value on asset performance

t e r U s
and availability. These organizations have Maintenance Planners that plan both long and short-
term requirements for resources and materials. These organizations have robust preventive

risk of failure.
I n
maintenance plans that ensure that the assets are maintained on a regular basis to decrease the

l
Predictive

c e
Organizations that are driven by heavy production demands or regulatory compliance invest

r a
heavily in predictive maintenance practices. The behavior and performance of assets is

O
observed based on capacity requirements, engineered capabilities, maintenance strategies, and
failure rates. These organizations employ a group of people to create a Reliability Centered

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 11
Maintenance practice. These groups monitor an assets performance and capture data such as
Mean Time between Asset Failures and Mean Time to Repair. This data then helps the
maintenance organization better strategize their PM programs.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 12
eAM Capabilities

m y
d e
ca
e A
eAM Capabilities
eAM enhances productivity through:
c l
r a
Internet based user-interface for both maintenance and operations personnel
Maintenance Strategy Planning
O ly
- A preventive maintenance strategy to maximize resource availability
Internet MRO Supply Chain
l & On
a e
- MRO materials procured through iProcurement/B2B

n
t e r
Production Asset Optimization

U s
- The assurance that an asset is available to run at full capacity based on design,

I n
demand, and maintenance strategy
Maintenance Cost Controls

l e
- Identification of resource effectively and material management

c
Asset Lifecycle Management

r a - Construct, procure, utilize, cost, maintain, and decommission process of an asset

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 13
eAM Functionality

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 14
Managing Assets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Managing Asset Numbers

c l
eAM eliminates the need for point solutions that offer a limited, "flat" view of an asset by

r a
expanding the visibility and ownership of an asset throughout an entire organization. Different
entities may describe an asset in several ways:
O ly
fixed asset to an accounting department

& On
leased asset to facilities management
l
n a e
piece of production equipment to operations
inventory item to materials management

e r s
maintainable asset to mechanical engineers
t U
I n
eAM incorporates the above views of an asset through a single entity. An asset is an entity for
which users can report problems. Assets can be cooling towers, cranes, buses, buildings,

c l e
conveyors, or anything that needs work. eAM provides the flexibility to address the many
types of assets through the definition of the following:

r a
asset groups and attributes
asset links to an enterprise

O asset costs and work history

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 15
asset activities and meters
By first establishing Asset Groups, you can define assets and asset characteristics that can be
inherited by the assets belonging to that group. Detailed information, such as nameplate data,
engineering specifications, property detail, and other searchable characteristics are defined
with asset attribute elements and values. Asset Groups also define a default master bill of
materials (BOM) for assets. This BOM can be edited for specific assets. Virtual assets can be
designed to create a network of assets or routings. This combines several assets to a single
work activity.
Oracle eAM enables you to quickly identify plants and facilities using an Asset Navigator. You
can view details of an asset, such as cost, hierarchal (parent/child) information, and launch
transactions. You can also view current or historical configurations, and work details of an
asset. As rotable, inventory items of an asset are removed from and reinstalled into an asset, the
asset genealogy and parent/child meter readings are recorded automatically. Attributes, such as
cost history, bills of material, and document attachments can be associated with a specific
asset.
Asset Hierarchies
You can focus on an asset hierarchy, or a set of parent/child relationships of an asset. You can
view all associated asset information such as asset details, bill of material, Work Orders,
maintenance activities, quality plans, maintenance costs, contract services, and Work Order
history. You can view cost information for one asset, or view rolled-up costs of its children
assets.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Asset Management > Asset Management
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 16
Hierarchy

m y
d e
ca
e A
Hierarchy

c l
A hierarchy depicts an asset (Capital Asset/Rebuildable Inventory) and its constituents in a

r a
parent and child relationship. As components are removed from and re-installed into the asset,
eAM tracks the genealogy and parent/child meter readings automatically. You can view the
O ly
cost history for a parent asset only or for all its constituents rolled up.

l & On
The graphic above illustrates the hierarchy for a facility. The parent items Building 100,
Building 200, and Building 300 belong to the Building Asset Group. The graphic expands on
a e
the Building 300 hierarchy and illustrates the three levels of child assets. For example, Floors,
n
Offices, and HVAC.

t e r U s
You can select a Hierarchy to review the parent/child relationship for an asset and also

I n
calculate the cost rollup at the parent level. It also serves as an integration point between eAM
and Oracle Property Manager.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 17
Managing Work

m y
d e
ca
e A
Work Management

c l
Preventive and Predictive Maintenance strategies are supported by eAM. Preventive

r a
Maintenance can be based on Day or Runtime intervals, as well as a specific list of dates, for
both assets and inventory items. Organizations that practice Predictive Maintenance can
O ly
monitor and scrutinize maintenance work history and performance trends with quality plans.

l & On
They can also study asset conditions by monitoring systems. By combining these strategies, an
organization can establish a maintenance strategy that ensures minimal downtime. Oracle

a e
Enterprise Asset Management enables you to monitor reliability and predict the need for

n
e r
maintenance in the future. You can identify any breach of performance defined by engineering
s
and immediately alert maintenance, monitor conditions of an asset, collect meter readings,

t U
forecast the frequency at which preventive maintenance should be performed, and establish

I n
Run to Failure schedules and forecasts, based on predicted failures.

e
Oracle eAM enables operations and maintenance staff to create work requests to report any
l
problems with an asset. To avoid duplicate Work Orders for the same issue, you can review
c
any outstanding work requests that are currently assigned to an asset. A supervisor can

r a
approve, place on hold, or reject a work request. An approved work request can be linked to a

O Work Order. The status of a work request is then updated when it is linked to a Work Order.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 18
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Overview of Oracle Enterprise Asset Management > Work Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 19
Executing Work

m y
d e
ca
e A
Work Orders

c l
The Work Order is the foundation of all maintenance organizations. Work orders define what

r a
resources and items are needed to conduct work. They can automatically generate

O ly
through the use of Preventive Maintenance Schedules, the issue of an inventoried rebuildable,
breach of quality results, or manually generated as a routine Work Order. These Work Orders

l & On
are then reviewed and shared with Operations to produce an estimated schedule.
Enterprise Asset Management integrates with Oracle Quality. Use Quality Collection Plans to

n a e
predefine required feedback information that must be entered into eAM, upon a Work Orders

t e r U s
completion. For example, data to collect may include inspection points for an Asset Number,
and Downtime variables. If a variance is recorded into the quality plan, a Work Request or

I n
Work Order is created. You can define quality collection plans directly on the Work Order, or
define them as attributes of an Activity to ultimately default into future Work Orders generated

c l e
for specific Asset Number/Activity combinations.
For each Work Order, the estimated costs aggregate, from the associated BOM and resources,

r a
to develop a costing profile for the current Work Order. You can use Costing Profiles for future
Budgeting and Forecasting.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 20
For each Work Order, the actual costs aggregate during the Work Orders lifecycle. These
costs roll up, based on the hierarchy of the current Work Orders associated Asset Number.
View these actual costs by period, at a transaction level, or at a summary level. Costs can roll
up, based on the hierarchy of Work Orders. You can view the costs (both actual and estimates)
by period, at a transaction or summary level.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 21
Maintenance Budgeting

m y
d e
ca
e A
Maintenance Budgeting

c l
By using Oracle General Ledger, you can measure budgeted costs against costs charged to

r a
maintenance Work Orders by account code combinations.

O ly
By using Project Funding, you can budget maintenance projects. You can estimate costs and
measure it against the actual costs incurred.

& On
Maintenance organizations use Project Cost Tracking to capture costs by project or task.
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 22
Planning in eAM

m y
d e
ca
e A
Planning

c l
Oracle Enterprise Asset Management utilizes Oracle Manufacturing Scheduling and Oracle

r a
Material Requirements Planning to ensure cost savings and work management efficiencies, by
generating predictive work activities. These work activities use a planning process to balance
O ly
the work load for resource management.
Using Oracle eAM:

l & On
You can ensure that sufficient resources, equipment, and material are available for all
maintenance tasks.
n a e
t e r U s
You can focus on a period of time and collect all the known maintenance work for that
planning time frame, associated with a responsible crew or department. This enables you

n
to process each item of work into a planned Work Order.
I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 23
Web-Based User Interface

m y
d e
ca
e A
Web-Based User Interface

c l
Oracle eAM provides a self-service user interface that is specifically designed for users, such

r a
as tradesperson and supervisors. The screens provide links to functional areas, commonly
associated with maintenance personnel, such as daily planning and work execution.
Trades Personnel Functionality O ly
Asset Navigator
l & On
Employee Schedules
n a e
Work Request Entry and Inquiry

e r
Work Order Detail Inquiry
t U s
I n
Work Order Notes Entry
Work Order Time Entry

l e
Trades personnel are craftsmen who perform maintenance tasks. Examples of trades personnel

c
include mechanics, electricians, machinists, utility and facilities workers.

r a
Daily Planning Functionality

O Easy Work Order


Asset Genealogy and Configuration History
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 24
Crew Schedule View
Work Order Detail Inquiry
Shift Work Order Handover Functionality
Work Order Task Completions
Procurement Catalogs for Non-Stocked Parts
Asset Costs for Maintenance, Contractors, and Operations
Professional Users Functionality
Asset Definition
Asset Groups, Activities, and Item Rebuild Definition
eAM Lookups and Parameters
Asset Meter Definition and Association
Maintenance Workbench
Preventive Maintenance Schedules
Department/Resource Setup
Material Issues
Work Order Definition and Execution
Quality Plan Definition
Maintenance User Workbench
You can quickly access your daily work information. After selecting Maintenance User
Workbench, you are automatically logged into your own personalized user interface. You
m y
can quickly access your daily work information, such as Work Orders and execution
processes. After selecting the Maintenance User Workbench role, you are automatically
d e
logged into your own personalized user interface. The Maintenance User Workbench
provides the information needed for you to evaluate the list of work that you need to
ca
complete, and to determine how to organize your workday.

e A
c l
A Key Performance Indicator dashboard displays a summary of your work today,
overdue work, and open work. You can view your Open, Past Due, and/or yesterdays

r a
work, as well as your Work Orders lined up for tomorrow. You can also view all of your
departments and/or Resources unassigned Work Orders. You can view attachments,
O ly
Work Order details, asset details, material requirements, and other employees assigned to

l & On
your Operations. You can enter quality results, meter readings, complete Operations,
Work Orders, charge resources, handover work, add notes, and assign yourself to Work

a e
Orders that are not yet assigned to an employee.

n
Maintenance Super User

t e r s
Maintenance Super User is an internet based user-interface for maintenance personnel. It
U
I n
introduces you to an easier approach of entering and searching for information from any
browser. Its step-by-step process requires minimal training and is intuitive enough for

c l e
you to find and update information.
Maintenance Super User is designed for the casual maintenance user (for example, trades

r a people, such as fitters, mechanics, and electricians), in a plant or facility. Responsibilities


can be assigned by employee or by role. This determines the information you can view

O and update.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 25
Stores
Material Issues to Work Orders and returns to Inventory are typical store room functions
and are provided by the Stores tab.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 26
Capital Asset or Rebuildable Inventory Performance and
Forecasting

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
Capital Asset or Rebuildable Inventory Performance and Forecasting

r a
Maintenance activities are forecasted by measuring a Capital Asset or Rebuildable Inventorys

O ly
performance against standards mentioned, in the Quality Plans associated with it. Quality plans
specify a breach condition (targets with specified ranges) and an action (create a work request).

l & On
You can monitor a Capital Asset or Rebuildable Inventorys performance by its meter
readings. When the breach condition is triggered, a Work Request that is specified in the
a e
collection plan is created for the referenced Asset Number.
n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 27
Using eAM for Plants and Facilities

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 28
Using eAM for Plants and Facilities

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 29
Complete Enterprise Integration for your Assets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Complete Integration

c l
Oracle Enterprise Asset Management is part of the Oracle E-Business suite, and directly

r a
integrates with Oracle Manufacturing, Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Property Management,
Oracle Quality, Oracle Inventory, Oracle Human Resources, Oracle Financials, Oracle Fixed
O ly
Assets, and Oracle Projects. This enables you to strategically monitor resource and cost

l & On
planning throughout the enterprise. Improvement programs can be enforced and reviewed to
ensure compliance with industry standards by tracking problems through to resolution.

a e
A well-planned maintenance environment depends on the ability of key personnel to view
n
r s
available inventory items, equipment, and skilled personnel. Because eAM is an enterprise

e
solution, you can view the resource availability for assets that are used by operations and
t U
coordinate maintenance work to minimize operation disruption. Most importantly, Oracle eAM

I n
is designed for the maintenance user who performs the work. Using Oracles Maintenance

c l e
User, trades people and supervisors with minimum training can easily perform their work.
Required Products

r a
To implement Enterprise Asset Management, you must have the following required products
installed:

O Oracle Inventory

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 30
Oracle Bills of Material
Oracle Human Resources
Oracle Cost Management
Oracle Manufacturing Scheduling
Oracle Quality
Oracle Work In Process
Optional Products
To implement Enterprise Asset Management, the following products are not required;
however, they are useful in the overall robust eAM solution:
Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP
Oracle Property Management
Oracle Financials
Oracle Fixed Assets
Oracle iProcurement
Oracle Projects
Oracle Project Manufacturing
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Order Management
Oracle Time and Labor

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 31
eAM Business Flow

m y
d e
ca
e A
eAM Business Flow
Work Requests Entry
c l
r a
Location, Asset ID, Owner Action or Activity, Current Work Alert, Condition Based
Alert
Work Order Generation O ly
l & On
Work Order Types, Owners, Locations, BOMs, Standards, Copies, Assets, Components,
PMs, Preplans
Task Planning
n a e
e r s
Task level planning, Dependent Steps
t U
Material Request

I n
BOM by Location, Asset Category, Component, Procurement, Catalogs, PO Detail, Item

l e
Statuses or Location Directs, Services, Rentals, Receipts

c
Resource Planning

r a
Assigned Owner, Crew, Craft, Skill Search or Selection, Duration, Contractors

O Forecasting

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 32
Asset Schedule or Availability, Capacity Performance, Work Impact on Production,
Future Work, Budget Impact
Work Scheduling
Workbenches with User Defined Filters for Folders and Sorts, Forecasted PMs, Available
Resources, WO Generation, Project Scheduling
Work Order Update and Close Out
Time Entry, Meter Readings, Inspection Data, Notes, Component Meter Reading
Asset Performance
Cost History, Work History, RCM Analysis, Design Capacity or Actual Performance,
Predictive Maintenance, KPIs, Trending Analysis, Inspection History, Event Tracking,
Capacity Impact
Non-maintenance personnel within an organization report problems as Work Requests. The
Work Request is then routed for approval and a Maintenance Planner is alerted to the need for
repair or services.
The planner conducts a walk through to estimate the materials and trades people needed to
conduct the repair. Some repairs may require that an asset be shutdown or brought into the
shop. In such cases, the planner meets with Operations to determine the most appropriate time
to remove the asset from service with minimal impact on production.
When the planner has determined the resources, materials, equipment, and time needed to
perform maintenance, the Work Order is assigned to the crew that executes the work. Crew
Supervisors pull the schedules defined by planners and assign the Work Order to the
tradesperson.
m y
Materials are issued, requisitions are generated, and time is entered against the Work Order
d e
operation as tasks are progressing. When the task is completed the tradesperson may enter
additional information about the work as well as meter and inspection reading conducted
ca
during the course of the work. The Work Order is then closed.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 33
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 34
User Roles

m y
d e
ca
e A
Enterprise Asset Management Administration

c l
The Enterprise Asset Management Administration role contains people who are generally

r a
responsible for entering information, often for other maintenance employees. Information
entered may include Work Order resource transactions, Work Order completion details, and
Time and Labor hours. This person
O ly
l & On
might have limited maintenance knowledge and is generally responsible for supporting the
maintenance department by handling information entry.

n
Enterprise Asset Management User
a e
t e r U s
The Enterprise Asset Management User is anyone in an organization who may access eAM.
This might include an employee who uses Work Requests to report problems, a Plant Manager

I n
who accesses eAM to review high cost assets and their work history, as well as a Maintenance
User, such as a technician who

l e
accesses the Maintenance User Workbench to review his/her daily work assignments.

c
Self-Service Work Requests User

r a
The Self-Service Work Requests User is a person in an organization, often an employee (not

O involved in the maintenance department), who uses Work Requests to report maintenance

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 35
problems. This person also uses Work Requests to check the statuses of problems that he/she
has reported.
Maintenance User
The Maintenance User is a maintenance person who is generally responsible for completing
tasks that are assigned on a Work Order. This person reports maintenance problems using
Work Requests, troubleshoots on jobs, and works on a team with other maintenance workers.
Maintenance Super User
The Maintenance Super User is generally a Maintenance Planner or Supervisor and is often
defined as a "super user". A Maintenance Planner plans and schedules maintenance jobs,
manages and balances work loads over time, manages preventive maintenance strategy and
scheduling, manages material
requirements, monitors availability, and coordinates strategies with other departments, such as
Operations, Purchasing, and Inventory. A Supervisor manages a crew of maintenance workers,
assigns jobs based on workers abilities and availability, inspects and verifies work,
communicates with other departments, knows the current status of all jobs and assets, and is
responsible for environmental health and safety.
This person has extensive knowledge of the Enterprise Asset Management system and is
responsible for creating and scheduling Work Orders, including Preventive Maintenance Work
Orders. This person updates Work Orders, orders parts, and completes operations and Work
Orders.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 36
Support for 21 CFR Part 11

m y
d e
ca
e A
Support for 21 CFR Part 11

c l
eAM provides support for 21 CFR Part 11 requirements during work order completion. There

r a
are two key elements provided to satisfy this requirement; Electronic Signature and Electronic
Records. These are provided using the Oracle Electronics Records and Electronic Signature
(ERES) framework.
O ly
l & On
Electronic Signatures insure that the person processing the transaction verifies their identity by
providing their userid and password at the time of the transaction.

n a e
Electronic records provide a permanent snapshot of the transaction data that you are verifying.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 37
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 38
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 39
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Asset Management Overview


Chapter 1 - Page 40
Setting Up Oracle Enterprise
Asset Management
Chapter 2

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 2
Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 4
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 5
eAM Setup Overview

m y
d e
ca
e A
eAM Setup Overview

c l
When installing Oracle Enterprise Asset Management (eAM), the installation process

r a
automatically creates five responsibilities: Enterprise Asset Management, Maintenance User
Workbench, Maintenance Super User, Self-Service Work Requests, and Self Service Time and
O ly
Expenses. Enterprise Asset Management is a super user responsibility. It includes the

l & On
necessary functions to set up and implement eAM. Before setting up eAM, set up the users and
assign their appropriate responsibilities for the implementation.

a e
eAM may have unique setups for each organization, including parameters, user defined
n
r s
lookups, and attributes. During the implementation process, the implementation team should

e
discuss system and user options. Users implementing eAM should also determine the structure
t U
of their organizations and user access via the Oracle System Administrator responsibility.

I n
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

c l e
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Oracle Enterprise
Asset Management Setup Overview

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 6
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 7
Organization Setup

m y
d e
ca
e A
Organization Setup

c l
Organization setup is required before you can set up additional eAM information.
Setting Up Organizations
r a
O ly
A valid organization is a requirement for eAM setup. Decisions are made during
implementation as to which organization(s) are enabled for eAM.
Enabling organizations for eAM
l & On
n a e
Before you begin implementing eAM, decide which organizations are eAM enabled. A
valid organization must exist before you can enable the organization for eAM.
Defining eAM parameters
t e r U s
I n
After you have established an Enterprise Asset Management enabled organization, set up
specific Enterprise Asset Management parameters that determine organization level

c l e
defaults for individual transactions. Set up information, such as Asset Number defaults,
Cost defaults, Work Request information, and Work Order defaults.

r a
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Organization Setup

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 8
Practice - Creating an Employee
Overview
In this practice, you will create yourself as an employee of Vision Operations.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle Applications with User Name mfg and Password welcome;
your instructor might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Each student needs to replace XX with a unique identifier

Tasks
Create a competency

1. Enter the following information, within the Competencies window:


Scope = Local
Name = XX Mechanic Oiler
Validate Dates From = Todays Date
Proficiency = Scale
Rating Scale = Global Yes/No
m y
d e
Create an employee

2. Enter the following information, within the People window: ca


Last = Your last name

e A
First = Your first name
Gender = Your gender
c l
Action = Create Employment
r
Person Type for Action = Buyera
O ly
Social Security = XX1-00-0000

& On
Birth Date = Your birth date

l
3.
a e
Enter the following information, within the Assignment window:

n
Organization = Vision Operations

e r
Job = MGR500.Manager
t U s
Position = MM400.Materials Manager

I n
Location = V1- New York City

l e
Supervisor Name = Jones, Ms. Kerry
Set of Books = Vision Operations (USA)
c
r a Operations Accounting Flex = 01-110-7640-0000-000

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 9
Associate your competency to your newly created employee

4. Enter the following information, within the Competence Profile window:


Competence = XX Mechanic Oiler
Proficiency Level = 2 Yes
Date From = Todays date

5. Record your Assignment/Employee Number: ________________________

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 10
Solution - Creating an Employee
Create a competency

Responsibility = US HRMS Manager

1. Navigate to the Competencies window.

(N) Career Management > Competencies (B) New

2. Enter the following information:


Scope = Local
Name = XX Mechanic Oiler
Validate Dates From = Todays Date
Proficiency = Scale
Rating Scale = Global Yes/No

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
3. (I) Save

t e r U s
n
4. Close the window.

e
Create an employee I
5.
c l
Navigate to the People window.

r a (N) People > Enter and Maintain (B) New


O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 11
6. Enter your Last name.

7. Enter your First name.

8. Select your Gender.

9. Select Create Employment from the Action list of values, and then select Buyer.

10. Enter XX1-00-0000 in the Social Security field.

11. Enter a Birth Date.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
12. (I) Save (B) Assignment

l & On
a e
13. Select Vision Operations from the Organization list of values.

n
14. (B) Correction (B) Cancel

t e r U s
n
15. Select MGR500.Manager from the Job list of values.

I
c
17. (B) Yesl e
16. Select MM400.Materials Manager from the Position list of values.

r a
18. Select V1- New York City from the Location list of values.
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 12
19. Select the Supervisor tab.

20. Select Jones, Ms. Kerry from the Name list of values.

m y
d e
21. Select the Purchase Order Information tab.
ca
22. Select Vision Operations (USA) from the Set of Books list of values.
e A
23. (B) OK
c l
r a
24. Enter 01-110-7640-0000-000, within the Operations Accounting Flex window.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O25. (B) OK (I) Save

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 13
26. Close the Assignment window.

Associate competency to your newly created employee

27. Within the People window, select Competence Profile.

(B) Others > Competence Profile > (B) OK

28. Select XX Mechanic Oiler from the Competence list of values.

29. Select 2 Yes from the Proficiency Level list of values.

30. Enter todays date in the Date From field.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
31. (I) Save

t e r U s
n
32. Close the Competence Profile window.
I
c l e
33. Record your Assignment/Employee Number: ________________________

a
34. Close the window.

r
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 14
Setting Up Organizations

m y
d e
ca
e A
Setting Up Organization
To set up Organizations:
c l
r a
1. Navigate to the Organization window.

O ly
2. Enter an organization Name, for example Seattle Maintenance.
3. Select an organization Type.

l & On
4. Save your work. A valid Location must be set up before you can save.

a e
5. In the Organization Classifications region, establish this organization as an Inventory

n
t e r
Organization. Select Inventory Organization from the Name list of values.
s
Note: An eAM organization must be classified as an Inventory Organization. You can
U
6. Save your work.
I n
classify an eAM as other product organizations, as well.

l e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

c
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Organization Setup >

a
Setting Up Organizations
r
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 15
Enabling Organizations for eAM

m y
d e
ca
e A
Enabling Organizations for eAM

c l
You can create a new eAM enabled organization, or convert an existing organization to an

r a
eAM enabled organization. Oracle recommends that you keep eAM organizations separate
from production organizations. eAM parameters are on the Inventory Parameters tab, within
the Organization Parameters window.
O ly
l & On
To define an Enterprise Asset Management enabled organization:
1. Navigate to the Organization Parameters window.

n a e
2. Enter a valid organization code. For information on how to create an organization.

e r s
3. Select the EAM Enabled check box to enable eAM for this organization. You cannot

t U
clear this check box after eAM items or eAM parameters are defined in the current
organization.
I n
4. If eAM is enabled for the current organization, the EAM Organization value defaults and

l e
is disabled; the current organization code defaults. For organizations that are not eAM
c
enabled, you can populate the EAM Organization field with an eAM enabled

r a organization code. The designated eAM organization maintains equipment items for the

O
designated production organization. For example, if the current organization is a
production organization, this is how you would identify a maintenance organization that

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 16
is associated with the production organization. You can update this field, if asset
equipment association does not exist in this organization.
5. Save your work.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Organization Setup >
Enabling Organizations for Enterprise Asset Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 17
Guided Demonstration - Enabling eAM Organizations
Responsibility: Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. (N) Setup > Organization Parameters (T) Inventory Parameters

2. Select the EM1 (Seattle Maintenance) Organization Code.

3. Discuss the following fields:

EAM Enabled This box is selected indicating that Enterprise Asset Management is
enabled for the current organization. This check box cannot be cleared after Enterprise
Asset Management items or Enterprise Asset Management parameters are defined in the
current organization.

Ensure that this check box is selected.

EAM Organization If Enterprise Asset Management is enabled for the current


organization, the EAM Organization value defaults and is disabled; the current
organization code defaults. For organizations that are not Enterprise Asset Management
enabled, you can populate the EAM Organization field with an Enterprise Asset
Management enabled organization code. The designated eAM organization maintains
equipment items for the designated production organization.
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 18
For example, if the current organization is a production organization, this field identifies
a maintenance organization to associate with this production organization. This field is
enabled if asset equipment association does not exist in this organization.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 19
Defining eAM Parameters

m y
d e
ca
e A
Defining eAM Parameters

c l
To define Enterprise Asset Management parameters:

r a
1. Navigate to the Enterprise Asset Management Parameters window.

O ly
2. Optionally indicate whether this organization has system generated Asset Numbers
within individual Asset Groups. You can specify the starting serial number within the

l & On
organization Parameters window and or the Master Item window, when defining Asset
Groups. If the starting serial number is defined for the Asset Group, this definition

n a e
overwrites the starting serial number within the Organization Parameters.

events are:
t e r U s
3. Click the Event Log Control to activate the the events to be logged. Some of the valid

I n
- Asset Activated
- Asset Checked In

c l e
- Asset Checked Out

r a - Asset Deactivated
- Child Added

O - Child Removed

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 20
4. The Cost Defaults region represents default cost information for future Work Orders,
without defined cost elements within the Work Order. Select an Enterprise Asset
Management Cost Element to indicate how to capture cost overheads and any
miscellaneous resource costs. Valid values are Equipment, Labor, and Material.
5. Select a Cost Category to use as the default for departments that do not have a cost
category defined. Department costs are then posted to the appropriate cost elements.
Valid values are Maintenance, Operations, Contract, and any other values that you might
have added within the extensible lookup table.
Setting Up
6. In the Preventive Maintenance region, optionally select the Implement From Horizon
Start Date check box to bypass past due Work Order suggestions when executing the
Preventive Maintenance process. If this check box is selected, suggested Work Orders,
from the Horizon Start Date forward, are executed.
7. Indicate whether Work Requests are automatically approved upon creation, or if every
user, with the responsibility assigned to the assets current owning department, receives a
notification using the Workflow. This notification appears within self service, within the
responsibility you use to log in.
If the Auto Approve check box is selected, Work Requests are created with an Awaiting
Work Order status. If the check box is not selected, Work Requests are created with an
Open status.
Note: A Work Request status must be Awaiting Work Order before you can associate it
with a Work Order. The Awaiting Work Order status indicates that the Work Request is
m y
approved.
8. Optionally select the Default Asset from Employee Location check box to indicate the
d e
Asset Number information defaults as the Location number exported from Property
ca
default asset information when creating a Work Request. If this check box is selected, the

Manager. Oracle Property Manager is a separate product.

e
9. If you choose the Extended Log check box, the system keeps an audit trail of records A
c l
when defining or updating Work Requests.

r a
10. Optionally select the Asset Number Mandatory check box to indicate that the Asset
Number field is mandatory when creating a Work Request.

O ly
11. In the Work Order Defaults region, select the WIP Accounting Class default to ensure

l & On
that Work Orders generated within Enterprise Asset Management have an established
account code structure assigned, to accept charges incurred by that Work Order. The WIP

a e
accounting class codes available are of type, Maintenance. If a Maintenance type WIP

n
r
accounting class does not exist, you can define a new one.

e s
Note: Cost Management handles maintenance Work Orders as nonstandard expense jobs.
t U
I n
12. Optionally, enter a Work Order Prefix. A prefix enables your organization to identify
routine Work Orders.

l e
13. Optionally select a Default Department. It is recommended that you select a default

c
department. This department defaults to maintenance Work Orders as they are entered. If

r a a department does not exist on a Work Order, you cannot release it.
14. Select the Enable Workflow for Work orders check box to enable workflow notifications
O to be sent.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 21
15. Indicate whether Material Issue Requests are enabled. If this check box is selected, the
Enable Material Issue Requests check box on eAM Work Orders defaults as selected.
16. Select the Value Rebuildables at Zero Cost to indicate that rebuildable components
charge at zero cost. If this check box is selected, rebuildable items issued out of the
subinventory expense account are issued at zero cost.
17. Indicate whether only billable items are invoiceable. If the Invoice Billable Items Only
check box is selected, only billable items can invoice; however, the item needs to be
invoiceable (Invoiceable Item and Invoice Enabled check boxes selected within the
Master Item window and the Billing Type check box needs to be selected.
If the Invoice Billable Items Only check box is not selected, any item can be invoiced if it
is invoiceable within the Master Item window (Invoiceable Item and Invoice Enabled
check boxes selected within the Master Item window.
18. If you select the Auto Firm on Release check box, the dates on the Work Order cannot
automatically reschedule.
19. Within the Account Defaults region, select a Maintenance Offset account. You can create
or break a Parent/Child (hierarchy) relationship that exists between an Asset Number and
a Rebuildable Serial Number, manually using the Configuration History page. This
account records what is sent to Inventory when a Rebuildable is removed from an Asset,
and then transferred into Inventory.
- For example, if the relationship is broken, the Asset or Rebuildable is sent to either
Scrap or Inventory. If the Rebuildable is sent to Inventory, the accounting is as
follows:
m y
Debit Inventory
Credit Maintenance Offset
d e
20. Save your work.
c
- For example, if the relationship is broken, the Asset or Rebuildable is sent to either
a
Scrap or Inventory. If the Rebuildable is sent to Inventory, the accounting is as

e A
follows:
Debit Inventory
c l
r
Credit Maintenance Offset
a
O ly
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Organization Setup >
Defining eAM Parameters

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 22
Practice - Setting Up Organization User Values
Overview
In this practice, you will set up an Asset Subinventory, a Planner Code, and a WIP Accounting
Class.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle Applications with User Name mfg and Password welcome;
your instructor might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

You have completed all previous practices

Tasks
Define an asset subinventory
m y
1. Enter the following information within the Subinventories window:
d e
c a
Field

e A
Value
Name

c l XX eAM SUB
Description
Asset Subinventory
r a XX eAM Subinventory
Selected

O ly
Create a planner code

l & On
2.
a e
Enter the following information within the Planners window:

n
t e r
Field
U s Value
Name
I n XX Planner

c l
Employeee
Description XX Planner
Your employee (yourself)

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 23
Create a WIP accounting class

3. Enter the following information, within the WIP Accounting Classes window:
Class = XX eAM ACC
Description = XX MAINTENANCE ACCOUNTING CLASS
Type = Maintenance
Material (Valuation) = 01-580-5320-0000-000
Material (Variance) = 01-520-5320-0000-000
Material Overhead = 01-580-5320-0000-000
Resource (Valuation) = 01-580-5321-0000-000
Resource (Variance) = 01-520-5321-0000-000
Outside Processing (Valuation) = 01-580-5322-0000-000
Outside Processing (Variance) = 01-520-5322-0000-000
Overhead (Valuation) = 01-580-5323--0000-000
Overhead (Variance) = 01-520-5323-0000-000
Completion Cost Source = System Calculated
System Option = Use Actual Resources

Open current accounting period

4. Within the Inventory Accounting Periods window, page down until you find the current
month and year of today's date, then select that period.

m y
5. Change the status to Open.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 24
Solution Setting Up Organization User Values
Define an asset subinventory

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Subinventories window.

(N) Inventory > Setup > Organizations > Subinventories

Select the EM1 organization.

(B) New

2. Enter XX eAM SUB in the Name field.

3. Enter XX eAM Subinventory in the Description field.

4. Select the Asset Subinventory check box.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 25
5. (I) Save

6. Close the windows.

Create a planner code

7. Navigate to the Planners window.

(N) Inventory > Setup > Planners

8. Enter XX Planner in the Name field.

9. Enter XX Planner in the Description field.

10. Select your Employee (yourself) from the list of values.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
11. (I) Save
r a
12. Close the window. O ly
Create a WIP accounting class
l & On
n a e

t e r
13. Navigate to the WIP Accounting Classes window.

U s
Setup > WIP > WIP Accounting Classes

I n
14. Enter the following header information:

l e
Class = XX eAM ACC

c
Description = XX MAINTENANCE ACCOUNTING CLASS

r a Type = Maintenance

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 26
15. Enter the following information within the Accounts region:
Material (Valuation) = 01-580-5320-0000-000
Material (Variance) = 01-520-5320-0000-000
Material Overhead = 01-580-5320-0000-000
Resource (Valuation) = 01-580-5321-0000-000
Resource (Variance) = 01-520-5321-0000-000
Outside Processing (Valuation) = 01-580-5322-0000-000
Outside Processing (Variance) = 01-520-5322-0000-000
Overhead (Valuation) = 01-580-5323-0000-000
Overhead (Variance) = 01-520-5323-0000-000

16. Enter the following information within the Costing region:


Completion Cost Source = System Calculated
System Option = Use Actual Resources

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
17. (I) Save
t e r U s
18. Close the window.
I n
c l e
Open current accounting period

r a
19. Navigate to the Inventory Accounting Periods window.

O (N) Inventory > Accounting Close Cycle > Inventory Accounting Periods
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 27
20. Page down until you find the current month and year of today's date, then select that period.

21. (B) Change Status to (Open) (B) OK

22. (I) Save

23. Close the window.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 28
Guided Demonstration - Defining eAM Parameters
Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Enterprise Asset Management Parameters window.

(N) Setup > Parameters

2. Enter the following information:


Asset Number Auto Generation = Selected
Cost Element = Equipment
Cost Category = Maintenance
Implement From Horizon Start Date = Cleared
Auto Approve = Selected
Extended Log = Selected
Default Asset From Employee Location = Cleared
Asset Number Mandatory = Selected
WIP Accounting Class = MaintWAC
Work Order Prefix = WO
Default Department = Blank
Enable Material Issue Requests = Selected
Invoice Billable Items Only = Selected
Value Rebuildables at Zero Cost = Selected
m y
Auto Firm On Release = Selected
d e
Maintenance Offset = 01-520-7530-0000-000

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 29
m y
d e
3. (I) Save ca
e A
4. Close the window.

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 30
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 31
Event Logging

m y
d e
ca
e A
Event Logging

c l
You can choose Event Log Controls to select the events that are logged for assets within the

r a
current organization. You can select the Log Enabled check box next to the events that you
want logged for your assets.
O ly
If you select Asset Operational Log , then you can view all current and past asset operational

l & On
information, such as Check Out, Check In, associated Work Requests and Work Orders. You
can remove or add a child asset, remove a parent asset, activate or deactivate the asset, transfer
a e
the asset to another location, and receive or issue the asset into or from Inventory. By default,
n
t e r
logging is turned off for an.

U s
1. Select Asset Operational Log from the View drop down list.
2. Choose Go.
I n
3. Query information by a date and time period or Event. Choose Go.

l e
4. Choose Create Events to create events that occur for the asset. This information is
c
important and helps you analyze the asset's lifecycle. Choose Apply when finished. These

r a events are extensible; you can add to them.

O 5. Select the Return to Search hypertext link to return to the Asset Numbers page.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 32
6. Select the Check Out icon to check out an asset. You can view asset details, enter
collection plan data, enter meter information, and optionally create a Work Request from
this page.
7. Choose Apply. The Asset Details page appears.
8. Select the Return to Search hypertext link to return to the Asset Numbers page.
9. Choose the Check In icon to check this asset in. You can view asset details, enter
collection plan data, enter meter information, and optionally create a Work Request from
this page.
10. Choose Apply.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Organization Setup >
Defining eAM Parameters

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 33
Areas

m y
d e
ca
e A
Areas

c l
Use Areas to logically sort assets by the zones in which they reside. Areas divide the

r a
maintenance plant or facility into zones, which help to track and account for assets. Areas are
later associated with assets.
O ly
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

Setting Up Areas
l & On
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > General eAM Setup >

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 34
Practice - Defining Areas
Overview
Use Areas to logically sort assets by the zones in which they reside. Areas divide the
maintenance plant or facility into zones, which help to track and account for assets. Areas are
later associated with assets.

In this practice, you will create an area.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

You have completed all previous practices

m y
Tasks
d e
Define an area
c a
Enter the following information, within the Area window:

e A
c l
Area
Field

r a XX MINING
Value

Description
O ly XX MINING

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 35
Solution - Defining Areas
Define an area

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Area window.

(N) Setup > Area

2. Enter XX MINING in the Area field.

3. Enter XX MINING in the Description field.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
4. (I) Save
r a
O ly
5. Close the window.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 36
Resources

m y
d e
ca
e A
Resources

c l
Resources are defined before departments. When you define a department, you specify

r a
available resources. A resource represents a craft. You can enter multiple resources for each
department. For each resource, you can specify the shifts that the resource is available. For
O ly
each resource shift, you can specify capacity modifications that change the available hours per
day, units per day, or workdays.

l & On
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
a e
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > General eAM Setup >
n
t e r
Defining Departments and Resources

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 37
Practice - Defining Resources
Overview
A resource represents a craft. You can enter multiple resources for each department. For each
resource, you can specify the shifts that the resource is available. For each resource shift, you can
specify capacity modifications that change the available hours per day, units per day, or
workdays.

Resources can be anything, besides Material. Resources are defined and then associated with
costs and overheads. To bill charges for resources, you must first create a Billing Item. In this
practice, you will define a billing item, and then define two resources: Lubrication Truck
(equipment) and Oiler (person) to operate the truck.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

m y
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

d e
You have completed all previous practices
ca
Tasks

e A
Assign the item to EM1 organization
c l
Create an equipment item
r a
O ly
Create a Lubrication Truck that will associate with the Resource.

1.
l & On
Enter the following information, within the Master Item window:
Item = XX LUBE TRUCK
n a e
e r
Description = XX LUBE TRUCK
Generation = Predefined

t
Starting Prefix = XX-
U s
I n
Starting Number = 1000

3.
c e
Equipment = Selected
l
Apply the Equipment Item template.

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 38
Assign the item to EM1 organization

Generate serial numbers

Generate serial numbers for the truck.

4. Enter the following information within the Generate Serial Numbers, System Items window:
Item = XX LUB TRUCK

5. Enter the following information within the Generate Serial Numbers, Parameters window:
Quantity = 2

6. (B) OK (B) Submit (B) No

Create an equipment resource

7. Enter the following information, within the Resources window:


Resource = XXLUBETRUC
Description = XX LUBRICATION TRUCK
Type = Machine
UOM = HR
Charge Type = Manual
Basis = Item
Costed = Selected
Standard Rate = Selected
m y
Absorption Account = 01-580-7740-0000-000
Variance Account = 01-520-5360-0000-000 d e
ca
8. Enter the following information, within the Resource Costs window:
Cost Type = AvgRates
e A
Resource Unit Cost = 150

c l
9.
r a
Enter the following information, within the Equipment Types window:
Equipment = XX LUBE TRUCK
O ly
Create a person resource

l & On
a e
Create a Mechanic / Oiler Resource and associate your employee number with it.

n
t e
Resource = XXOILER r U s
10. Enter the following information, within the Resources window:

I
Type = Personn
Description = XX LUB TRUCK MECHANIC / OILER

l e
UOM = HR

c
Charge Type = Manual

r a Basis = Item
Billing Item = XX BILLING ITEM

O Costed = Selected

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 39
Standard Rate = Selected
Absorption Account = 01-580-7740-0000-000
Variance Account = 01-520-5360-0000-000
Competence = XX Mechanic Oiler
Skill Level = 2-Yes

11. Enter the following information, within the Resource Costs window:
Cost Type = AvgRates
Resource Unit Cost = 25

12. Enter the following information, within the Employees window:


Employee = your employee number from the Creating an Employee practice

Note: Based on this setup, you are the only employee qualified for the task.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 40
Solution - Defining Resources
Create an equipment item

First, create a Lubrication Truck that will associate with the Resource.

1. Navigate to the Master Item window.

Inventory > Items > Master Items

2. Enter XX LUB TRUCK in the Item field.

3. Enter XX LUB TRUCK in the Description field.

4. Apply the Equipment Item template.

(M) Tools > Copy From

Select Equipment Item from the Template list of values.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
O
5.
ra
(B) Apply (B) Done

Select the Inventory tab, and enter the following information within the Serial region:

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 41
Generation = Predefined
Starting Prefix = XX-
Starting Number = 1000

m y
d e
ca
6. Select the Physical Attributes tab, and enter the following information within the Type
e A
region:
Equipment = Selected
c l
7. (I) Save r a
O ly
Assign the item to EM1 organization

l & On
8.
a e
From the Tools menu, select the Organization Assignment option.

n
9.
r s
Select the Assigned check box for the EM1 organization.

t e U
10. (I) Save
I n
c l e
11. Close the window.

Generate serial numbers

r a
O
Generate serial numbers for the truck.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 42
12. Navigate to the Generate Serial Numbers window.

Inventory > On Hand, Availability > Generate Serial Numbers

13. Enter the following information in the System Items window:


Item = XX LUBE TRUCK

14. (B) OK

15. Enter the following information in the Parameters window:


Quantity = 2

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
16. (B) OK (B) Submit (B) No
O ly
Create an equipment resource
l & On
a e
17. Navigate to the Resources window.
n

e r
Setup > Routing > Resources
t U s
I n
18. Enter the following information:
Resource = XXLUBETRUC

l e
Description = XX LUBRICATION TRUCK

c
Type = Machine

r a UOM = HR

O Charge Type = Manual


Basis = Item

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 43
Costed = Selected
Standard Rate = Selected
Absorption Account = 01-580-7740-0000-000
Variance Account = 01-520-5360-0000-000

m y
d e
ca
e A
19. (B) Rates
c l
20. Enter the following information:
Cost Type = AvgRates r a
Resource Unit Cost = 150
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 44
21. (I) Save

22. Close the Resource Costs window.

23. (B) Equipment

24. Enter the following information:


Equipment = XX LUBE TRUCK
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
25. (I) Save

c l e
26. Close the windows.

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 45
Create a person resource

Create a Mechanic / Oiler Resource and associate your employee number with it.

27. Navigate to the Resources window.

Setup > Routing > Resources

28. Enter the following information:


Resource = XXOILER
Description = XX LUB TRUCK MECHANIC / OILER
Type = Person
UOM = HR
Charge Type = Manual
Basis = Item
Billing Item = XX BILLING ITEM
Costed = Selected
Standard Rate = Selected
Absorption Account = 01-580-7740-0000-000
Variance Account = 01-520-5360-0000-000
Competence = XX Mechanic Oiler
Skill Level = 2-Yes

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 46
29. (B) Rates

30. Enter the following information:


Cost Type = AvgRates
Resource Unit Cost = 25

31. (I) Save

32. Close the Resource Costs window.


m y
33. (B) Employees
d e
34. Enter the following information:
ca
Employee = your employee number from the Creating an Employee practice

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 47
35. (I) Save

Note: Based on this setup, you are the only employee qualified for the task.

36. Close the windows.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 48
Departments

m y
d e
ca
e A
Departments

c l
A department represents a crew within your organization. A crew may include people,

r a
machines, or suppliers. Departments are also used to collect costs, apply overhead, and
compare load to capacity. Assign a department to each operation of a routing and assign
O ly
resources that are available for that department. The department assigned to each operation of a

l & On
routing also becomes the assigned department of the corresponding operation within the Work
Order, assuming the Work Order is using the routing.

a e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
n
t e r
Defining Departments and Resources
U s
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > General eAM Setup >

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 49
Practice - Defining Departments
Overview
A department represents a crew within your organization, containing one or more people,
machines, or suppliers, where you want to collect costs, apply overhead, and compare load to
capacity. You assign a department to each operation of a routing and assign resources that are
available for that department.

When you define a department, you specify available resources. A resource represents a craft.
You can enter multiple resources for each department. For each resource, you can specify the
shifts that the resource is available. For each resource shift, you can also specify capacity
modifications that change the available hours per day, units per day, or workdays.

In this practice, you will define a department and assign the two resources, Lubrication Truck
(equipment) and Oiler (person) to operate the truck, to the department.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor


might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1


m y
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
d e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations
ca

e
You have completed all previous practices A
c l
Tasks
r a
Define a department
O ly
1.
& On
Enter the following information, within the Departments window:
Department = XX MAINT
l
a e
Description = XX MAINTENANCE DEPARTMENT
n
t e r U s
Cost Category = Maintenance

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 50
Associate your resources with the department

2. Enter the following information, within the Resources window:

Field Value
Resource XXLUBTRUCK
Available 24 Hours Disabled
Units 1
Resource XXOILER
Available 24 Hours Disabled
Units 1

3. For the first resource, enter the following information within the Shifts window:
Shift Num = 1

4. For the first resource, enter the following information, within the Instances window:
Equipment = XX LUB TRUCK

5.
Serial Number = XXX-1000

For the second resource, enter the following information within the Shifts window:
m y
Shift Num = 1
d e
6. For the second resource, enter the following information, within the Instances window:
Number = your employee number c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 51
Solution - Defining Departments
Define a department

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Departments window.

(N) Setup > Routing > Departments

2. Enter the following information:


Department = XX MAINT
Description = XX MAINTENANCE DEPARTMENT
Cost Category = Maintenance

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
a
Associate your resources with the department
r
3. (B) Resources
O ly
4.
& On
Within the Owned region, select XXLUBTRUCK from the Resource list of values.
l
5.
a e
Clear the Available 24 Hours check box.
n
6.
e r
Enter 1 in the Units field.
t U s
7.
I n
On the following line, select XXOILER from the Resource list of values.

8.
l e
Clear the Available 24 Hours check box.

c
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 52
9. Enter 1 in the Units field.

10. Select the first Resource.

11. (B) Shifts

12. Select 1 from the Shift Number list of values.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
13. (I) Save
t e r U s
I n
14. Close the Shifts window.

l e
15. (B) Instances

c
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 53
16. Enter the following information:
Equipment = XX LUB TRUCK
Serial Number = XXX-1000

17. (I) Save

18. Close the Instances window.

19. Select the second Resource.

m y
20. (B) Shifts

d e
21. Select 1 from the Shift Number list of values.

ca
22. (I) Save

e A
23. Close the Shifts window.

c l
24. (B) Instances
r a
25. Select your employee Number.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 54
26. (I) Save

27. Close the windows.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 55
Department Approvers

m y
d e
ca
e A
Department Approvers

c l
With a responsibility assigned to the current assets owing department, you can set up

r a
department approvers so that Work Request notifications are sent to each approver using the
Oracle Workflow. Approvers can view these notifications on the Enterprise Asset Management
O ly
Self Service Maintenance Home Page. Everyone who receives the notification can access the

l & On
Work Request to change its status, or add additional information to the Work Request log.
After one user approves the Work Request, the notification is removed from the users

a e
notification lists, and the Work Request status transitions from Open to Awaiting Work Order.

n
r s
A Work Request can be rejected. If an approver rejects a Work Request, the notification is

e
removed from that approvers notification list. You can re-assign a notification to another user
t U
for approval or additional information; for example, the originator might need to provide

I n
additional information on the Work Request.

c l e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > General eAM Setup >

a
Defining Department Approvers

r
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 56
Practice - Defining Department Approvers
Overview
With a responsibility assigned to the current assets owing department, you can set up
department approvers so that Work Request notifications are sent to each approver, via Oracle
Workflow. Approvers can view these notifications on the Enterprise Asset Management Self
Service Maintenance Home Page. Everyone who receives the notification can access the Work
Request to change its status, or add additional information to the Work Request log. After one
user approves the Work Request, the notification is removed from the users notification lists,
and the Work Request status transitions from Open to Awaiting Work Order.

A Work Request can be rejected. If an approver rejects a Work Request, the notification is
removed from that approvers notification list. You can re-assign a notification to another user
for approval or additional information; for example, the originator might need to provide
additional information on the Work Request.

In this practice, you will define a department approver.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use
m y
Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1
d e
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
c a

e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations A
c l
a
You have completed all previous practices

r
Tasks
O ly
Define a department approver
l & On
a e
Enter the following information within the Department Approvers window:
n
t e r U s
I n
Responsibility Name
Field Value
Enterprise Asset Management, Vision

c l e
Department
Operations
XX MAINT

O ra Primary Approver MFG

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 57
Solution - Defining Department Approvers
Define a department approver

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Department Approvers window.

(N) Setup > Department Approvers

2. Select Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations, from the Responsibility Name list
of values.

3. Enter the following information:


Department = XX MAINT
Primary Approver = MFG

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
4. (I) Save

n a e
5. Close the window.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 58
Miscellaneous Documents

m y
d e
ca
e A
Miscellaneous Documents

c l
You can create text and files, such as spreadsheets, graphics, and OLE objects. You can attach

r a
these documents to a maintenance Work Order, asset, or operation.
To define miscellaneous documents:
O ly
1. Navigate to the Miscellaneous Documents window.

l & On
2. Select a Data Type. Valid values are File, Long Text, Short Text, and Web Page.

n a e
3. If the Data Type is File, attach the appropriate file. If the Data Type is Web Page, enter
the relevant URL. If the Data Types are Long or Short Text, insert the text in the Text
field.

t e r U s
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

I n
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > General eAM Setup >
Defining Miscellaneous Documents

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 59
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 60
Lookups

m y
d e
ca
e A
Lookups

c l
Lookup codes are decided upon and defined during the implementation process. Lookup codes

r a
categorized into: extensible, user-defined, or system-defined. If a lookup code is extensible, the
existing lookup codes cannot be modified, but you can add new codes to the table. If lookup
O ly
codes are user-defined, then all codes can be modified. If lookup codes are system-defined,

l & On
then the existing codes cannot be modified and new codes cannot be added to the table.
Define Asset Lookups, Work Request Lookups, and Work Order Lookups.
Activity Types
n a e
t e r U s
Activity Types describe the type of maintenance work performed on an asset. For
example, Inspections, Lubrications, Overhauls, Calibration, and Repetitive work. Activity

Activity Causes I n
Types are extensible.

l e
Activity Cause codes are reasons for an asset failure. For example, Preventive, Normal
c
Wear, Rework, and Breakdown. This information lets you understand the dynamics that

r a affect an assets ability to perform. They establish critical data for reporting and analysis

O
of asset failure causes and the frequency of such conditions. Asset Cause Codes are
referenced when setting up an Activity. Activity Cause codes are extensible.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 61
Activity Sources
Activity Source codes represent reasons activities are performed. For example, Warranty
Compliance, OSHA Compliance, or Military Specification Requirements. Activity
Source Codes are referenced when setting up an Activity. Activity Source codes are
extensible.
Asset Activity Priorities
Activity Priority codes indicate Asset Activity priority levels, for example, Low,
Medium, and High. Activity Priorities are extensible.
Cost Category Codes
Cost Category codes are used as the default for departments that do not have a cost
category defined. Department costs are then posted to the appropriate cost elements.
Valid values are Maintenance, Operations, Contract, and any other values that you add to
the extensible lookup table.
Criticality Codes
Criticality Codes suggest the importance of an asset to an organization. For example,
High and Low. An asset that has a direct impact on production or that is difficult to
replace is considered a critical asset. Asset criticality helps you determine the urgency of
requested work. Asset Criticality Codes are referenced when defining an asset. Asset
Criticality Codes are extensible.
Asset Import Scope Codes
The eAM Asset Number Open Interface lets you import Asset Numbers into eAM, using
a batch process. You can optionally import Asset Number attributes. You can create new
m y
Asset Numbers and attributes, or update existing Asset Numbers and attributes. Define
the process parameter scope codes. Asset Import Scope Codes are user-defined.
d e
Asset Import Statuses
ca
The eAM Asset Number Open Interface lets you import Asset Numbers into eAM, using

e
a batch process. You can optionally import Asset Number attributes. You can create newA
c l
Asset Numbers and attributes, or update existing Asset Numbers and attributes. Define
the process import statuses. Asset Import Statuses are user-defined.
Contact Preferences
r a
O ly
You can set up Contact Preferences. Contact Preferences are extensible.
Work Request Statuses

l & On
Work Request Approval is the process of changing a Work Request status from Open to

a e
Awaiting Work Order. Maintenance Work Orders are linked to Work Requests with a

n
e r
status of Awaiting Work Order. When defining eAM parameters, if the Auto Approve
s
check box is selected, then Work Requests are created with an automatic status of

t U
Awaiting Work Order for that organization. If the check box is not selected, then Work

I n
Requests are created with a status of Open; any user who receives the notification can
change the Work Request status to Awaiting Work Order. A plant or facility might need

l e
to include additional statuses. Currently, the workflow cannot be customized to work

c
with user-defined Work Request statuses. Work Request Approval statuses are

r a extensible.

O Work Request Types

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 62
Work Request Types describe and categorize Work Requests. For example, Manual,
System, Routine, Capital, and Furniture. Work Request Types are extensible.
Work Order and Work Request Priority Codes
Work Order Priority Codes contribute to the organization and execution of Work Orders.
For example, High, Medium, and Low, or 1,2, and 3, respectively. Typically, a priority is
assigned by the people entering Work Requests and Work Orders. The planner or
supervisor compares this priority to the asset criticality. These codes are entered when
creating Activity associations, Work Orders, and Work Requests. Typically, a priority is
assigned by the person that enters the Work Request and its related Work Order. Priority
specified during Activity association becomes the Work Order priority when a Work
Order is created, using the Activity Association. Work Order Priority Codes are
extensible.
Work Order Reconciliation Codes
Reconciliation Codes detail how Work Orders and operations were completed. These
codes are categorized into Completed as Planned or Partial Completion. You can further
define the condition within these two types of completion statuses. These codes let you
evaluate Work Orders by percentage completed or delayed, and if they were delayed,
then the reason for the delay. Reconciliation Codes are extensible.
Work Order Types
Work Order Types let you differentiate Work Orders. For example, Routine and Rebuild.
Maintenance management uses this information to sort and monitor work activity for
reporting and budgeting. Work Order Types are referenced in the Activity and Work
m y
Order. Work Order Types are created manually or automatically. For example,
Rebuildable Work Orders are created automatically or manually. Preventive Maintenance
d e
Work Orders are created automatically, based on meter readings. Work Order Types are
extensible.
ca
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

e
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Defining Lookups A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 63
Practice - Defining Lookup Codes
Overview
Lookup codes must be decided upon and defined during the implementation process. Lookup
codes fall within three categories: extensible, user defined, or system defined. If a lookup code is
extensible, the existing lookup codes cannot be modified, but you can add new codes to the table.
If lookup codes are user defined, all codes may be modified. If lookup codes are system defined,
the existing codes cannot be modified, and new codes cannot be added to the table.

In this practice, you will see how to define Activity Types. Activity Types are used to describe
the type of maintenance work that is performed on an asset, for example, Inspections,
Lubrications, Overhauls, Calibration, and Repetitive work. Activity Types are extensible.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

m y
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

d e
You have completed all previous practices
ca
Tasks

e A
To define activity types
c l
1.
r a
Execute a query, within the Manufacturing Lookups window:

O ly
F11 or (M) View > Query By Example > Enter


l & On
Enter Activity Type in the Meaning field.


n a e
2. Add codes.
t e r
(M) View > Query By Example > Run

U s
I n
(I) New. Ensure that the Enabled check box is selected.

c l e
Warning: Do not use alpha codes. Entering of alpha codes causes database errors in the

r a application.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 64
Note: If you would like to add codes to, or view codes for, additional lookups, the
following table lists the lookup meanings, and their associated types; they are user
defined or extensible (system defined lookups are not listed):

Meaning Type
Activity Cause MTL_EAM_ACTIVITY_CAUSE
Activity Source MTL_EAM_ACTIVITY_SOURCE
Activity Priority WIP_EAM_ACTIVITY_PRIORITY
Cost Category Codes BOM_EAM_COST_CATEGORY
Asset Criticality MTL_EAM_ASSET_CRITICALITY
Asset Import Scope Codes EAM_ASSET_IMPORT_SCOPE
Asset Import Statuses EAM_ASSET_IMPORT_STATUS
Contact Preferences WIP_EAM_CONTACT_PREFERENCE
Work Request Statuses WIP_EAM_WORK_REQ_STATUS
Work Request Types WIP_EAM_WORK_REQ_TYPE
Priority Codes WIP_EAM_ACTIVITY_PRIORITY
EAM Reconciliation Code
EAM Work Order Type
WIP_EAM_RECONCILIATION_CODE
WIP_EAM_WORK_ORDER_TYPE
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 65
Solution - Defining Lookup Codes
To define activity types

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Manufacturing Lookups window.

(N) Setup > Lookups

2. Execute a query.

F11 or (M) View > Query By Example > Enter

Enter Activity Type in the Meaning field.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 66
(M) View > Query By Example > Run

m y
3. To add a code:

d e
(I) New. Ensure that the Enabled check box is selected.

ca
application.
e A
Warning: Do not use alpha codes. Entering of alpha codes causes database errors in the

4. Close the window.


c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 67
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 68
Category Codes and Sets

m y
d e
ca
e A
Category Codes and Sets

c l
Category codes are used as naming conventions for assets by creating classes and subclasses.

r a
They are user-defined and logically group assets simplifying the search for Asset Numbers.

O ly
For example, Cranes are classified by several different types, such as Overhead Cranes, Jib
Cranes, and Mobile Cranes. You can query using the class CRANE, which displays all assets

l & On
defined as Cranes within that organization. If you enter CRANES.JIB, the system would then
narrow the results to just those assets defined as Jib Cranes. With both queries, you can
a e
identify assets based on familiar names, rather than numbers.
n
t e r U s
Category codes are first defined, then added to the Enterprise Asset Management Category Set.
After they belong to the category set, they are associated with Asset Groups, which tie to
individual assets.

I n
To set up category codes:

l e
1. Navigate to the Find Categories window. You can find existing category codes or create

c
new ones.

r a
2. Choose New.

O 3. Select the Asset Management category to create a new Class.Subclass from the Structure
Name list of values.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 69
4. Enter in a new Category, for example TRUCK.FRKLFT.
5. Add a long Description for this category.
6. Select the Enabled check box to indicate that this category is enabled.
7. Enter an Inactive On date.
8. Select the Enabled for iProcurement check box to indicate that this category is enabled
for iProcurement.
9. Select the Viewable by Supplier check box to indicate that this category is viewed by the
Supplier.
10. Save your work.
To set up category sets:
To associate Category Codes (TRUCK.FRKLFT) with an Asset Group, first define the item
category relationship using the Category Sets menu option.
1. Navigate to the Category Sets window.
2. Select the flashlight icon from the tools menu, then select Enterprise Asset Management.
3. A description defaults; you can optionally change it.
4. Select Asset Management from the Flex Structure list of values.
5. Indicate the Controlled At level. Valid values are Master Level and Organization Level.
6. Enter a Default Category code for the Category Set.
7. If you select Allow Multiple Item Category Assignments, then you can define a series of
categories, such as Crane.Jib, and Crane.Overhead, that are associated to a single Asset
m y
Group.
8. If you select Enforce List of Valid Categories, then you are preventing users from
d e
the asset being created.
ca
entering incorrect categories that are not associated with the Asset Group associated with

9. Enter the Category Codes that you want to associate with this category set.

e A
Group.
c l
10. Select Assign to display a table enabling you to associate the categories with an Asset

11. Save your work.


r a
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
O ly
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Setting Up Category Codes

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 70
Practice - Defining Category Codes and Sets
Overview
Category codes are used as naming conventions for assets by creating classes and subclasses.
They are user defined, and used to logically group assets, simplifying the search for Asset
Numbers.

For example, several different types, such as Overhead Cranes, Jib Cranes, and Mobile Cranes,
classify Cranes. You can query using the class CRANE, which displays all assets defined as
Cranes within that organization. If you enter CRANES.JIB, the system would then narrow the
results to just those assets defined as Jib Cranes. With both queries, you can identify assets based
on familiar names, rather than numbers.

Category codes are first defined, then added to the Enterprise Asset Management Category Set.
After they belong to this category set, they are associated with Asset Groups, which tie to
individual assets.

In this practice, you will define a category code, XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET, and then view the
category set, Enterprise Asset Management.

Assumptions
m y
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use
d e
Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1
c a

e
Students replace XX with a unique identifier A

c l
r a
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

O ly
You have completed all previous practices

Tasks
l & On
Define a category code
n a e
1.
e r s
Enter the following information within the Categories window:
t U
Structure Name
I n Field
Asset Management
Value

l
Category

c e XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET

r a Description XX EQUIPMENT ASSET

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 71
View the category set

View the Category Set that is used for eAM. Do not change any values, because table locks can
occur.

2. Execute a query, within the Category Sets window:

(I) Find

Within the Find Category Sets window, select Enterprise Asset Management.

Note: The Category Set is controlled at the Master Level.

3. Clear the Enforce List of Valid Categories check box.

Note: To avoid table locks, the Enforce List of Valid Categories check box is NOT selected
FOR THESE PRACTICES TO AVOID TABLE LOCKS.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 72
Solution - Defining Category Codes and Sets
Define a category code

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Categories window.

(N) Setup > Category > Category Codes (B) New

2. Select Asset Management from the Structure Name list of values.

3. Enter XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET in the Category field (XX EQUIPMENT is the Class, and
ASSET is the Subclass).

4. Enter XX EQUIPMENT ASSET in the Description field.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
5. (I) Save O ly
6. Close the window.
l & On
n a e
View the category set

t e r U s
View the Category Set that is used for eAM. Do not change any values, because table locks can
occur.
I n
7.
l e
Navigate to the Category Sets window.
c
O
8.
ra
(N) Setup > Category > Category Sets

(I) Find

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 73
9. Within the Find Category Sets window, select Enterprise Asset Management.

Note: The Category Set is controlled at the Master Level.

10. Clear the Enforce List of Valid Categories check box.

Note: To avoid table locks, the Enforce List of Valid Categories check box is NOT selected
FOR THESE PRACTICES TO AVOID TABLE LOCKS.

m y
d e
ca
e A
11. (I) Save
c l
12. Close the window. r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 74
User-Defined Work Order Status

m y
d e
ca
e A
User-Defined Work Order Status

c l
A Work Order might require approvals or notifications at different stages of its lifecycle. For

r a
example, organizations typically want an approval process in place before a Work Order is
released. Workflow automates this process. You can initiate Workflow to generate
O ly
notifications, approvals, transactions, and update a Work Order status. You can enable

l & On
Workflow for Work Orders within the eAM Parameters. You can set up Business Events and
Event Subscriptions (or use seeded events and subscriptions) within Oracle Workflow to

a e
indicate what events trigger Workflow. Seeded events that you can enable to trigger Workflow

n
e r
are: Work Order creation, Work Order release approval, Work Order completion, Work Order
s
status change, Operation completion.

t U
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

I n
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Maintenance User Workbench >

c l e
Viewing and Managing your Work

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 75
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 76
Asset Groups

m y
d e
ca
e A
Asset Groups

c l
During implementation, Asset Group (Asset Group or Rebuildable Item) names are

r a
established. Asset Groups represent groups of assets that are virtually identical. Generally, an
Asset Group is defined for each Manufacturer and Model Number combination (Make, Model,
O ly
and Year). Examples include Acme Model 123 Pump and Ford F150 2002 Truck.

l & On
Note: If you have assets in your organization that are virtually identical (for example, the same
manufacturer and model), consider creating a Asset Group for those assets.
To set up asset groups:
n a e
t e r U s
1. Navigate to the Asset Group (Master Item) window. The Master Item window is used to
create Asset Groups, Activities, and Rebuildable Items.

I n
2. Enter the Asset Group name in the Item field.
3. Enter a Description for this Asset Group, up to 240 characters.

c l e
4. Use the @Asset Group template to quickly apply attribute values, and to ensure that the

r a appropriate attributes are applied.


Note: You can create Asset Groups using the template described above or copy an Asset

O Group from an existing Asset Group.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 77
5. In the Serial Generation region, select Predefined for the Generation value.
6. Define a Starting Prefix and Starting Number for this Asset Group. If Serial Generation is
set at Item Level for the Organization, the system defaults the prefix, along with the
starting number sequence, when a new Asset Number is created for this Asset Group.
7. Optionally select the paperclip Attachments icon to attach relevant documents, such as
drawings, standard procedures, and reference guides, to this Asset Group. You can attach
file, URL, and text attachments.
8. Save your work.
To associate asset groups with multiple organizations:
1. From the Asset Groups window, select Item Details from the Tools menu.
2. Select the Organization Assignment tab.
3. Enter additional organizations in the available table.
4. After saving your work, you can create Assets for this Asset Group.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Defining Asset Groups

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 78
Practice - Defining Asset Groups
Overview
During implementation, Asset Group (Asset Group or Rebuildable Item) names are established.
Asset Groups represent groups of assets that are virtually identical. Generally, an Asset Group is
defined for each Manufacturer and Model Number combination (Make, Model, and Year).
Examples include Acme Model 123 Pump and Ford F150 2002 Truck.

Note: If you have assets in your organization that are virtually identical (for example, the same
manufacturer and model), consider creating an Asset Group for those assets.

In this practice, you will create an asset group, XX EQUIPMENT.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

m y
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

d e
You have completed all previous practices
ca
Tasks

e A
Create an asset group
c l
1.
r a
Enter the following information, within the Master Item window:
Item = XX EQUIPMENT
Description = XX EQUIPMENT O ly
2.
l
Apply the @Asset Group template& On
n a e
3.

t e r
Select the Inventory tab, and enter the following information:
Starting Prefix = XX-
Starting Number = 1000
U s
4. I n
Associate the Asset Group with your Category.

c l e
Assign the asset group to EM1 organization

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 79
Solution - Defining Asset Groups
Create an asset group

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Master Item window.

(N) Assets > Asset Group

2. Enter the following information:


Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Description = XX EQUIPMENT
Template = @Asset Group

3. Enter the following in the Serial Generation Tab Region:


Generation = Predefined
Starting Prefix = XX
Starting Number = 1100

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
4. (I) Save
l & On
5.
a e
Associate the Asset Group with your Category.
n

e r s
(M) Tools > Item Details > (M) Tools > Categories from the Master Item window.
t U

I n
Enter the following information, within the Category Assignment window:
Category Set = Enterprise Asset Management
l e
Category = BUILDING.OFFICE
c
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 80
(I) Save

Close the Category Assignment window.

Assign the asset group to EM1 organization


m y
6. (M) Tools > Organization Assignment
d e
7. Select the Assigned check box for the EM1 organization.
ca
8. (I) Save

e A
9. Close the window.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 81
Attributes

m y
d e
ca
e A
Attribute Templates

c l
You can define common characteristics data specific to Asset Groups, such as Facility

r a
Information, Engineering Specifications, Regulation Requirements, Horsepower, Voltage, and
Square Footage, by creating Attribute Groups using descriptive flexfields. After the Attribute
O ly
Group is created, you can then assign it to an Asset Group. This enables you to define

l & On
additional characteristics data when defining an asset associated with the Asset Group. This
provides extensive query capabilities. Attribute groups are descriptive flexfields, defined by
segments and values.

n a e
r s
For example, you can define an Attribute Group, Front Loader Nameplate data. This group can

e
then be associated with the CARS Asset Group. When defining an asset within the CARS
t U
Asset Group, you can optionally utilize the attributes to specify nameplate data (specified data

I n
such as make, year, and model) for the asset. This creates a simplified way of entering

c l e
specified data related to a specific Asset Group.
To set up attributes:

r a
1. Navigate to the Descriptive Flexfield Segments window.
2. Select the Oracle Inventory Application and select Setup, Flexfields > Descriptive.
O 3. Select the Oracle Inventory Application with the Title, Asset Attributes.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 82
4. Unfreeze the Flexfield Definition by deselecting the Freeze Flexfield Definition check
box.
5. In the Context Field Values region, select a row, then click the New icon. A blank row is
added for you to create an attribute group.
6. Enter the attribute group name in the Code field.
7. Optionally enter a Description for this attribute group.
8. Select Segments to add attributes to the attribute group you just created.
9. Enter a Number to sequence the data.
10. Define the Name of the specific attribute. The Window Prompt defaults to this name.
11. Select a Column value.
12. Select a Value Set, or Optionally choose Value Set to create a new one.
13. If the Displayed check box is selected, this attribute appears for you when defining data
for an asset within the Asset Group (for example, CARS) associated with the attribute
group (for example, NAMEPLATE) that this attribute (for example, Make) resides in.
14. Optionally select the Enabled check box to enable the attribute for availability when
defining assets.
15. Save your work, and return to the Descriptive Flexfield Segments window.
16. Select the Freeze Flexfield Definition check box. Failure to do this prevents you from
querying the segments from the Attribute window.
17. Save your work.
To associate the Attribute Group with an Asset Group:
m y
1. Navigate to the Attributes Assignment window.
d e
In the below example, any asset created within the CARS Asset Group has the
NAMEPLATE attribute group available as an option for data entry.
ca
2. Select an Asset Group.

e A
3. Select an Attribute Group Code.

c l
You can have an unlimited number of Attribute Groups associated with an Asset Group.
4. Save your work.
r a
O ly
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Setting Up Attributes
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 83
Practice - Defining Attributes
Overview
You can define common characteristics data specific to Asset Groups, such as Facility
Information, Engineering Specifications, Regulation Requirements, Horsepower, Voltage, and
Square Footage, by creating Attribute Groups using descriptive flexfields. After the Attribute
Group is created, you can then assign it to an Asset Group. This enables you to define additional
characteristics data when defining an asset associated with the Asset Group. This provides
extensive query capabilities. Attribute groups are descriptive flexfields, defined by segments and
values.

For example, you can define an Attribute Group, Front Loader Nameplate data. This group can
then be associated with the CARS Asset Group. When defining an asset within the CARS Asset
Group, you can optionally utilize the attributes to specify nameplate data (specified data such as
make, year, and model) for the asset. This creates a simplified way of entering specified data
related to a specific Asset Group.

In this practice, you will define an asset attribute group.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
m y
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use
d e
Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1
ca
Students replace XX with a unique identifier

e A

c l
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations


r a
You have completed all previous practices

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 84
Tasks
Define an asset attribute template

1. Enter the following information within the Descriptive Flexfield Segments window:

Field Value
Application Inventory
Title Asset Attributes
Code XX EQUIPMENT
Name XX EQUIPMENT (defaults)
Description XX EQUIPMENT

2. Enter the following information within the Segments Summary window:

Number Name Column Value Set


10
20
Make
Model
C_ATTRIBUTE1
C_ATTRIBUTE2
15 Characters
15 Characters
m y
30 Serial Number C_ATTRIBUTE3
d e
15 Characters

Associate an attribute template with an asset group


c a
3. Enter the following information within the Attribute Assignments window:

e A
c l
Field
r a Value
Asset Group
O ly XX EQUIPMENT

& On
Attribute Group Code XX EQUIPMENT

l
a e
r n s
n t e U
e I
c l
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 85
Solution - Defining Attributes
Define an asset attribute template

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Descriptive Flexfield Segments window.

(N) Setup > Flexfields > Descriptive > Segments

2. Execute a query.

(I) Find

Select Inventory, Title: Asset Attributes, from the list of values.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
(B) OK
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 86
3. Clear the Freeze Flexfield Definition check box.

4. (B) OK
m y
5. Within the Context Field Values region, place the cursor in the Code field.
d e
6. (I) New
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 87
7. Enter the following information:
Code = XX EQUIPMENT
Name = Defaults (enabled for change)
Description = XX EQUIPMENT

m y
d e
8. (B) Segments
c a
9. Enter the following information:

e A
c l
Number

r a
Name /
Window Prompt
Column Value Set

10 Make O ly C_ATTRIBUTE1 15 Characters


20
l
Model
& On C_ATTRIBUTE2 15 Characters
30

n a e
Serial Number C_ATTRIBUTE3 15 Characters

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 88
10. (I) Save

11. Close the Segments Summary window.

12. Select the Freeze Flexfield Definition check box.

m y
13. (B) OK

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O14. (B) Compile (B) OK (B) OK

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 89
15. Close the window.

Associate an attribute template with an asset group

16. Navigate to the Attributes Assignment window.

(N) Setup > Attribute Assignments

17. Select Asset Group, XX EQUIPMENT, from the Find list of values.

18. Select XX EQUIPMENT from the Attribute Group Code list of values.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
19. (I) Save
r a
20. Close the window.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 90
Asset Numbers

m y
d e
ca
e A
Assets

c l
Enterprise Asset Management provides the following methods to enter a new asset. You can

r a
create them individually, by copying information from an existing asset, utilize the multiple
asset entry method, or use the Import Asset Number interface. You must first set up an Asset
Group, before defining Asset Numbers.
O ly
To define assets individually:

l & On
1. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.

n a e
2. Select an Asset Group. This Asset Group is associated with this asset.

e r s
After an Asset Group is associated with an asset and then saved, it cannot be changed.

t U
3. Enter an Asset Number if you do not have them automatically generated, or accept or

I n
modify the default, if you have automatic generation enabled.

c l e
After an asset is saved, it cannot be deleted. The asset can be deactivated if there are no
open Work Orders or Work Requests for the asset, and if the asset is not part of an asset

r a hierarchy.
4. Optionally enter an Asset Description, up to 240 characters.

O 5. Select an Asset Group. This Asset Group is associated with this asset.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 91
The Asset Serial Number defaults to the Asset Number. You can optionally select the
next serial number for the current organization.
If serial uniqueness is not across organizations, more than one asset might have the same
Asset Number. The Asset Serial Number is globally unique and maintains uniqueness, in
this circumstance. It is predefined in this window, or generated during a receipt
transaction.
6. Optionally associate this asset to an Asset Category. This is the Class and Subclass code,
such as CRANE.OVERHEAD or BUILDING.FLOOR.
7. Within the Main tab, optionally select an Owning Department for this asset to represent
the crew responsible for the asset. Notifications, regarding Work Requests, are sent to the
Primary Approver of the Work Request's associated asset's current owning department.
8. Select a Criticality code to indicate the importance of the asset to the organization. This
field is for information purposes.
9. Select a WIP Accounting Class to identify the Expense cost elements associated with the
work performed, such as materials, labor, and resources.
10. Enter the Area where this asset resides. This is a user defined listing of logical areas of
work. For example, North Plant, East Wing, or Area 1.
11. Indicate whether this asset is maintainable. If the Maintainable check box is selected, you
can create Work Requests and Work Orders for this asset.
For example, you can create an asset for cost-tracking purposes. We may want to see the
cost for all top level assets in an asset hierarchy, but we do not want to maintain those
assets. In this situation, do not select this check box.
m y
After Work Orders are created for this asset, you cannot clear this check box unless those
Work Orders are at Complete, Canceled or Closed statuses.
d e
12. Select the Active check box to indicate that the asset is functioning, for example,
ca
maintenance Work Orders can be created for this asset. This check box change when you
activate or deactivate an asset from the Tools menu.
e A
c l
13. Indicate whether Asset Operational Logging is enabled for this asset. If you select the
Operation Log Enabled check box, then you can view all current and past asset

r a
operational information, such as Check Out, Check In, associated Work Requests and

O ly
Work Orders. You can remove or add a child asset, remove a parent asset, activate or
deactivate the asset, transfer the asset to another location, and receive or issue the asset

l & On
into and from Inventory. By default, logging is not enabled for an asset.
14. Within the Parent region, select a parent Asset Number to establish asset hierarchy

n a e
information. Work Order costs rollup through the Parent and Child hierarchies defined,

t e r U s
and can rollup to any level within an asset hierarchy. This lets you review all cost
associated with an asset or asset hierarchal view.

I n
15. Enter the Warranty Expiration date for the asset.
16. Indicate whether the current asset is checked in or out.You can check out an asset to view

l e
asset details, enter collection plan data, enter meter information, and optionally create a

c
Work Request, within Maintenance Super User. This check box is protected against

r a update.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 92
17. Within the Location tab, the Subinventory and Locator fields are view only and display
the subinventory location of the asset within Inventory and its Locator segments. If this
asset is received into Inventory, then these fields are populated.
18. Select a Location Code to specify a physical location for this asset. The Address field
simultaneously populates with the selected Location Code's associated Address. The
previously defined Area is organization-specific and not associated to a physical location.
Valid Location Codes are defined within Install Base.
19. The Address defaults as the populated Location Code's associated address. You can
optionally select a different address. If the current asset is in stores, the address of the
Location's organization appears.
20. Select a Production Organization. The list of values displays the production inventory
organizations maintained by the current asset's organization.
21. Select an Equipment Item. This is mandatory if you entered a Production Organization.
Items that were defined with an equipment template or with the Equipment item attribute
enabled are available.
22. Enter an Equipment Serial Number. This is mandatory if you entered a Production
Organization. This is the specific name of the component within the Equipment Type.
23. Select the Others tab to optionally enter the Fixed Asset region information, if Oracle
Fixed Assets is installed. This is Enterprise Asset Management's integration with Fixed
Assets. Enter a Category, which is a grouping of fixed assets, defined within Oracle
Fixed Assets. This category is tied to a set of books, and must be the same set of books
that is assigned to the current Enterprise Asset Management organization.
m y
24. Enter the Number if Oracle Fixed Assets is installed. This represents a fixed Asset
Number that belongs to a fixed asset category, associated with the asset.
d e
25. The Property Management fields, Location Name and Location Code, default from a
Property Manager export process (Export Locations to Enterprise Asset Management), if
ca
Oracle Property Management is installed. These fields are disabled. These values cannot
be changed.
e A
c l
Before the Property Management information is passed from Property Manager into

r a
Enterprise Asset Management, Asset Groups must have been established.
26. Choose Location Details to view or update Property Manager field information.
O ly
27. Select Attributes to enter attribute values for the asset. Existing, enabled Attribute Groups

l & On
appear. These Attribute Groups are optional. You do not need to enter values for all
existing Attribute Groups. From this window, you cannot generate Attribute Groups.

n a e
28. You can choose Resource Usage if the fields in the Production Equipment region are

t e r U s
populated. This enables you to view production Work Orders using the equipment that
corresponds with this Asset Number as a resource.

I n
29. Select Associate Activity to directly associate this Asset with an Activity.
30. Enter file, URL, or text attachments to this asset by choosing the paperclip Attachments

l e
icon. You can then choose Document Catalog to add asset specific documents.

c
31. Save your work.

r a
To copy assets from existing assets:

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 93
You can copy asset information from existing assets. When using this method, everything
copies to the new asset, including attributes and attachments. Equipment Serial Numbers are
not copied. Enter the Equipment Serial Number when saving.
1. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.
2. Select an Asset Group. This Asset Group is associated with this asset.
3. Enter an Asset Number if you do not have them automatically generated, or accept or
modify the default, if you have automatic generation enabled. After an asset has been
saved, it cannot be deleted. The asset can be deactivated if there are no open Work Orders
or Work Requests for the asset, and if the asset is not part of an asset hierarchy.
4. Optionally enter an Asset Description, up to 240 characters.
5. Select Copy Asset Number from the Tools menu.
6. Select the desired Asset.
7. Associate this Asset to an Asset Category. This is the Class and Subclass code, such as
CRANE.OVERHEAD, or BUILDING.FLOOR.
8. Select an Owning Department for this asset. E-mail notifications, regarding Work
Requests, are sent to the Primary Approver of the Work Request's associated asset's
owning department.
9. Save your work.
To deactivate an asset:
1. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.
2. Select the flashlight Find icon to display the Find Asset Number window.
m y
3. Select an Asset Number to deactivate.
5. Save your work.
d e
To activate an asset:
ca
1. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.

e
2. Select the flashlight Find icon to display the Find Asset Number window. A
c l
3. Select a Deactivated Asset Number to activate.

r a
4. Select Re-Activate Asset Number from the Tools menu.
5. Save your work.
O ly
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

Defining Asset Numbers


l & On
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >

Asset Documents
n a e
t e r U s
You can attach existing documents to an asset, and create text to associate with an asset. You
can attach text, URLs, or files, such as spreadsheets, graphics, and OLE objects. When creating

I n
a Work Order for an asset with attachments, the asset's attachments attach to the Work Order
for that asset. For this to function, the appropriate attachment category, Asset Attachments (1),

l e
must associate with the attachment function, EAMWOMDF.

c
To define asset documents:

r a1. Navigate to the EAM Asset Documents window.

O 2. Select a Data Type.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 94
3. If the Data Type is File, attach the appropriate File. If the Data Type is Web Page, enter
the relevant URL. If the Data Type is Short Text, insert the text in the text field.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Defining Asset Documents

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 95
Practice - Defining Assets
Overview
Enterprise Asset Management provides three methods in which you can enter a new asset. You
can create them individually, by copying information from an existing asset, utilize the multiple
asset entry method, or use the Import Asset Number interface.

You must first set up an Asset Group, before defining Asset Numbers.

In this practice, you will first create one asset individually. Next, you will utilize the multiple
asset entry method to create one more asset. You will create an asset via copying information
from an existing asset, deactivate an asset, and then reactivate it.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

m y
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

d e
You have completed all previous practices
ca
Tasks

e A
Create an asset individually
c l
1.
r a
Enter the following information, within the Define Asset Number window:
Asset Number = XX-1200
Description = XX 994 FEL O ly
l & On
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Serial Number = Defaults as XX-1600 (automatic generation is enabled)
a e
Asset Category = XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET
n
t
Area = XX MINING
e r
Department = XX MAINT

U s
I n
Criticality = High
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC

l e
Maintainable = Selected

c
Active = Selected

r a Operation Log Enabled = Selected

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 96
2. Enter the following information in the Asset Attributes window:

Field Value
Attribute Group XX EQUIPMENT
Make CATERPILLAR
Model 994
Serial Number XX-1235

Create assets utilizing the multiple asset entry method

3. Still within the Define Asset Number window, place the curser in the Asset Group field.

4. (I) New

5. Enter the following information:


Asset Number = XX-1201
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Serial Number = XX-1007 (default)
Description = BUCKET
Asset Category = XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET
m y
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Area = XX MINING
d e
Criticality = High
Asset Type = Capital
c a
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Maintainable = Selected
e A
Active = Selected
c l
r
Parent Asset Number = XX-1200 a
Operation Log Enabled = Selected

O ly
& On
6. Enter the following information, within the Asset Attributes window:

l
a e
r n
Field

s
Value
Attribute Group
Make
n t e U
XX EQUIPMENT
EASCO
Model

e I 45 yard

c l
Serial Number XX-5342568

r a
Create an asset by copying information from an existing asset

O7. Still within the Define Asset Number window, place the curser in the Asset Group field.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 97
8. (I) New

9. Enter the following information:


Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Number = XX-1202

10. Place the curser in the Owning Department field, and copy from Asset Number, XX-1200.

11. Change the Serial Number, within the Asset Attributes window, to XX-12345678.

Deactivate an asset

12. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.

(N) Assets > Asset Numbers > Asset Numbers

13. Execute a query for Asset Number, XX-1202.

14. (M) Tools > De-Activate Asset Number

The Active check box is now clear.

Reactivate an asset

15. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.


m y
(N) Assets > Asset Numbers > Asset Numbers
d e
16. Execute a query for Asset Number, XX-1202.
ca
17. (M) Tools > Re-Activate Asset
e A
The Active check box is now selected.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 98
Solution - Defining Assets
Create an asset individually

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.

(N) Assets > Asset Numbers > Asset Numbers

2. Enter the following information:


Asset Number = XX-1200
Description = XX 994 FEL
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Serial Number = Defaults as XX-1600 (automatic generation is enabled)
Asset Category = XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET
Department = XX MAINT
Area = XX MINING
Criticality = High
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Maintainable = Selected
Active = Selected
m y
Operation Log Enabled = Selected

d e
3. (I) Save

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 99
m y
4. (B) Attributes

d e
5. Select XX EQUIPMENT from the Attribute Group list of values.

c a
6. Enter the following information in the Asset Attributes window:

e A
Field
c l Value
Make
r a CATERPILLAR
Model
O ly 994
Serial Number

l & On XX-1235

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 100
7. (B) OK (I) Save

8. Close the Asset Attributes window.


m y
Create assets utilizing the multiple asset entry method
d e
9. Place the curser in the Asset Group field.
ca
10. (I) New
e A
11. Enter the following information:
c l
Asset Number = XX-1201
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT r a
O ly
Asset Serial Number = XX-1007 (default)
Description = BUCKET

l & On
Asset Category = XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET

a e
Owning Department = XX MAINT
n
Area = XX MINING

e
Criticality = High
t r
Asset Type = Capital U s
I n
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC

c l e
Maintainable = Selected
Active = Selected

r a Operation Log Enabled = Selected


Parent Asset Number = XX-1200

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 101
m y
12. (I) Save (B) Attributes

d e
13. Select XX EQUIPMENT from the Attribute Group list of values.

c a
14. Enter the following information in the Asset Attributes window:

e A
Field
c l Value
Make
r a EASCO
Model
O ly 45 yard
Serial Number

l & On XX-5342568

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 102
15. (B) OK (I) Save

16. Close the Asset Attributes window.


m y
Create an asset by copying information from an existing asset
d e
17. Place the curser in the Asset Numb field.
ca
18. (I) New
e A
19. Enter the following information:
c l
Asset Number = XX-1202
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT r a
O ly
Asset Serial Number = XX-1010

& On
Asset Category = XX EQUIPMENT.ASSET

l
a e
20. Place the curser in the Owning Department field.

n
t e r U s
21. (M) Tools > Copy Asset Number from

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 103
22. In the Copy Asset Number window, select XX-1200 from the Asset Number list of values.

m y
d e
23. (B) Copy (I) Save (B) Attributes
ca
24. Place the curser in the Attribute Values field.

e A
c
25. Change the Serial Number to XX-12345678. l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 104
26. (B) OK (I) Save

27. Close the windows.


m y
Deactivate an asset
d e
28. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.
ca
(N) Assets > Asset Numbers > Asset Numbers
e A
29. Execute a query.
c l

r a
(M) View > Query By Example > Enter or F11

O ly
& On
Enter XX-1202 in the Asset Number field.

l
a e
(M) View > Query By Example > Run

r n s
30. (M) Tools > De-Activate Asset Number

31. (B) OK (I) Save


n t e U
e I
The Active check box is now clear.

c l
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 105
m y
32. Close the window.

d e
Reactivate an asset

ca
33. Navigate to the Define Asset Number window.

e A

l
(N) Assets > Asset Numbers > Asset Numbers

c
34. Execute a query.
r a

O ly
(M) View > Query By Example > Enter or F11


l & On
Enter XX-1202 in the Asset Number field.


n a e
(M) View > Query By Example > Run

t e r
35. (M) Tools > Re-Activate Asset
U s
36. (B) OK (I) Save
I n
l e
The Active check box is now selected.
c
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 106
m y
37. Close the window.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 107
Asset Routes

m y
d e
ca
e A
Asset Routes

c l
You might need to perform an Activity on multiple Asset Numbers. To eliminate the

r a
possibility of creating multiple Work Orders for the same Activity, you can define Asset
Routes. You can define a Preventive Maintenance schedule for your Asset Route to specify
O ly
when an Activity should be scheduled for the Asset Route. You can define day interval rules
for Asset Routes.
To define asset routes:
l & On
n a e
1. Navigate to the Define Asset Route window.
2. Select an Asset Group.

t e r U s
3. Enter the name of the Asset Route in the Asset Number field.

I n
4. The Asset Serial Number defaults to the Asset Number. You can optionally select the
next serial number for the current organization.

c l e
If serial uniqueness is not across organizations, more than one asset route might have the

r a same Asset Number. The Asset Serial Number is globally unique and maintains
uniqueness, in this circumstance.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 108
5. Associate this Asset Route to an Asset Category. This is the Class and Subclass code,
such as CRANE.OVERHEAD or BUILDING.FLOOR.
6. Within the Main tab, optionally select an Owning Department for this Asset Route. This
represents the crew responsible for the asset. Notifications, regarding Work Requests, are
sent to the Primary Approver of the Work Request's associated asset's current owning
department.
7. Select a Criticality code to indicate the importance of the Asset Route to the organization.
This field is for information purposes.
8. Select a WIP Accounting Class to identify the Expense cost elements associated with the
work performed, such as materials, labor, and resources.
9. Enter the Area where this Asset Route resides. This is a user-defined listing of logical
areas of work. For example, North Plant, East Wing, or Area 1.
10. Indicate whether this Asset Route is maintainable. If the Maintainable check box is
selected, you can create Work Requests and Work Orders for this Asset Route.
11. Choose Asset Route to display the Asset Route window.
12. In the Associated Asset Numbers region, select an Asset Group.
13. Select an Asset Number. Asset Numbers associated with the previously selected Asset
Group are available. You can associate an unlimited number of Asset Numbers.
14. Enter Effective Dates. If the Effective Date From field is left blank, the system date
defaults.
15. Save your work.
m y
Note: Asset Numbers can associate with Asset Routes. An Asset Route cannot associate
with another Asset Route.
d e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
ca
Defining Asset Routes

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 109
Practice - Defining Asset Routes
Overview
You might need to perform an Activity on multiple Asset Numbers. To eliminate the possibility
of creating multiple Work Orders for the same Activity, you can define Asset Routes. You can
define a Preventive Maintenance schedule for your Asset Route to specify when an Activity
should be scheduled for the Asset Route. You can define day interval rules for Asset Routes.

In this practice, you will define an asset route.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

You have completed all previous practices


m y
Tasks
d e
Define an asset route
ca
1.
e
Enter the following information, within the Define Asset Route window: A
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
c l
Asset Number = change to XX EQUIPMENT WASHDOWN

r a
Description = EQUIPMENT WASHDOWN

O ly
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Criticality = Low
& On
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
l
Area = XX MINING

n a e
Maintainable = Selected
Active = Selected

t e r U s
2.
I n
Enter the following information, within the Asset List window:
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT

l e
Asset Number = XX-1000 and XX-1002

c
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 110
Solution - Defining Asset Routes
Define an asset route

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to Define Asset Route window.

(N) Assets > Asset Routes

2. Enter the following information:


Asset Number = XX EQUIPMENT 1
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Serial Number = change to XX EQUIPMENT WASHDOWN
Description = EQUIPMENT WASHDOWN
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Criticality = Low
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Area = XX MINING
Maintainable = Selected
Active = Selected

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
3.
c l e
(B) Asset Route

r
4. a Enter the following information:
O Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 111
Asset Number = XX-1000 and XX-1002

5. (I) Save

m y
6. Close the windows.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 112
Asset Bills of Material

m y
d e
ca
e A
Asset Bills of Material

c l
You can identify and select the required items that make up an asset. A bill of material (BOM)

r a
is used to list all items and components that make up a particular asset, and is defined for each
Asset Group. The items defined on an asset BOM are standard inventory components.
O ly
Note: Even if you are not using Project Manufacturing applications, Project Parameters

l & On
are defined for your eAM enabled organization to successfully create Asset Groups. This
is required because an Asset BOM is of type Model/Unit Effective and this BOM type is
a e
currently allowed if PJM organization parameters are set up for the eAM enabled
n
r s
organization to which the Asset Group has been assigned. To define Project Parameters,

e
open the Project Parameters window using Project Manufacturing Super User
t U
responsibility and without entering any data in the window, save the record.

I n
To set up an Asset BOM:

l e
1. Navigate to the Bills of Material window.

c
2. Select an Asset Group from the Item list of values.

r a
3. Within the Main tab, the Item Sequence and an Operation Sequence values default.

O 4. Enter the inventory Component to make up the Asset Number.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 113
5. Enter the Quantity of that component necessary for the asset.
6. Select the Serial Effectivity tab.
7. Select the Asset Number (Asset Numbers are always serialized) that the inventory items
are associated with, in the From and To fields. Asset Numbers associated with the current
Asset Group are available.
If the Component is installed in all Asset Numbers within the Asset Group, enter 0 in the
From field, and leave the To field blank.
8. Save your work.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Setting Up Asset Bills of Material

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 114
Practice - Defining an Asset BOM
Overview
You can identify and select the required items that make up an asset. A bill of material (BOM) is
used to list all items and components that make up a particular asset, and is defined for each
Asset Group. The items defined on an asset BOM are standard inventory components.

In this practice, you will define an asset BOM.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

You have completed all previous practices

m y
Tasks
d e
Define an asset BOM
c a
1. Within the Bills of Material window, select XX EQUIPMENT from the Item list of values.

e A
2. Enter the following information:
c l
r a
Item
Seq
Component
O ly Quantity Auto Request
Material
Serial Effectivity
From
Serial
Effectivity To
10 XX AIR FILTER
l & On 1 Selected XX-1000 XX-1000
20 XX AIR FILTER

n a e 20 Selected XX-1002 XX-1002


30
40
XX OIL FILTER

t e r
XX ENGINE OIL 10/40 53
U s 1 Selected
Selected
XX-1000
XX-1000
XX-1002
XX-1002

3. I
View the details. n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 115
Solution - Defining an Asset BOM
Define an asset BOM

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Bills of Material window.

(N) Assets > Asset BOM

2. Select XX EQUIPMENT from the Item list of values.

3. Enter the following information:

Item Component Quantity Auto Request Serial Effectivity Serial


Seq Material From Effectivity To
10 XX AIR FILTER 1 Selected XX-1000 XX-1000
20 XX AIR FILTER 20 Selected XX-1002 XX-1002
30 XX OIL FILTER 1 Selected XX-1000 XX-1002
40 XX ENGINE OIL 10/40 53 Selected XX-1000 XX-1002

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 116
4. View the details.

(B) Bill Details

m y
5. (I) Save

d e
6. Close the windows.

ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 117
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 118
Rebuildable Items and Serial Numbers

m y
d e
ca
e A
Rebuildable Items

c l
Items that are installed, removed, and refurbished are referred to as Rebuildable Items.

r a
Examples of Rebuildable Items include motors, control boxes, and computer boards.
Rebuildable Items might need to be removed or refurbished while a parent Asset is maintained.
O ly
Rebuildable Items are inventory items; you have the option to serialize them.
To set up rebuild items:

l & On
1. Navigate to the Rebuild Items window.

n a e
2. Enter the Rebuildable Item name in the Item field.

e r s
3. Enter a Description for this Rebuildable Item, up to 240 characters.

t U
4. Use the @Rebuildable template to quickly apply attribute values, and to ensure that the

I n
appropriate attributes are applied.

c l e
You can create Rebuildable Items using the template described above, or you can copy a
Rebuildable Item from an existing Rebuildable Item.

r a
5. In the Serial Generation region, select Predefined for the Generation value.
6. Define a Starting Prefix and Starting Number for this Rebuild Item. If Serial Generation

O is set at Item Level for the Organization, the system defaults the prefix, along with the

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 119
starting number sequence, when a new Serialized Rebuild is created for this Rebuild
Item.
7. Select the paperclip Attachments icon to attach relevant documents, such as drawings,
standard procedures, and reference guides, to this Rebuildable Item. You can attach file,
URL, and text attachments.
8. Save your work.
To associate rebuildable items to multiple organizations:
1. From the Master Item window, select TOOLS from the Tools menu.
2. Select Organization Assignment.
3. Enter additional organizations in the available window.
4. Save your work. After saving your work, this Rebuildable Item can associate with an
Activity.
Defining Rebuildable Serial Numbers
To set up rebuildable serial numbers individually:
1. Navigate to the Define Rebuildable Serial Number window.
2. Enter an Asset Number (Rebuildable Serial Number) if you do not have them
automatically generated. Accept or modify the default Asset Number, if you have
automatic generation enabled.
3. Select an Asset Group. This is the Asset Group (Rebuildable Item) you are associating
with the Rebuildable Serial Number you are currently creating.
Note: After an Asset Group (Rebuildable Item) is associated with a Rebuildable Serial
m y
Number and then saved, you cannot change it.
4. The Asset Serial Number (Rebuildable Serial Number) defaults to the Asset Number.
d e
You can optionally select the next serial number for the current organization.
ca
Asset Number. The Asset Serial Number is globally unique and maintains uniqueness, in
e A
If serial uniqueness is not across organizations, more than one asset might have the same

c l
this circumstance. It is predefined in this window, or generated during a receipt
transaction.Select an Asset Group. This is the Asset Group (Rebuildable Item) you are

r a
associating with the Rebuildable Serial Number you are currently creating.

O ly
Note: After an Asset Group (Rebuildable Item) is associated with a Rebuildable Serial
Number and then saved, you cannot change it.

& On
5. Enter an Asset Number (Rebuildable Serial Number) if you do not have them
l
a e
automatically generated. Accept or modify the default Asset Number, if you have

r n
automatic generation enabled.

s
6. Enter a description for the Rebuildable Serial Number of up to 240 characters.

t e U
7. Within the Main tab, optionally select an Owning Department for this Rebuildable Serial

n
I
Number. This represents the crew responsible for the Rebuildable Serial Number.
Notifications, regarding Work Requests, are sent to the Primary Approver of the Work
e
c l
Request's associated Asset Number's current owning department.
8. Select a Criticality code to indicate the importance of the Asset Number to the

r a organization. This field is for information purposes.

O 9. Select a WIP Accounting Class to identify the Expense cost elements associated with the
work performed, such as materials, labor, and resources.
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 120
10. Enter the Area where this Asset Number resides. This is a user defined listing of logical
areas of work. For example, North Plant, East Wing, or Area 1.
11. Indicate whether this asset is maintainable. If the Maintainable check box is selected, you
can create Work Requests and Work Orders for this asset.
For example, you can create an asset for cost-tracking purposes. We may want to see the
cost for all top level assets in an asset hierarchy, but we do not want to maintain those
assets. In this situation, do not select this check box.
Note: After Work Orders are created for this asset, you cannot clear this check box unless
those Work Orders are at Complete, Canceled or Closed statuses.
12. Select the Active check box to indicate that the asset is functioning, for example,
maintenance Work Orders can be created for this asset. This check box change when you
activate or deactivate an asset from the Tools menu.
13. Indicate whether Asset Operational Logging is enabled for this asset. If you select the
Operation Log Enabled check box, you can view all current and past asset operational
information, such as Check Out, Check In, associated Work Requests and Work Orders.
You can remove or add a child asset, remove a parent asset, activate or deactivate the
asset, transfer the asset to another location, and receive or issue the asset into and from
Inventory. By default, logging is turned off for an asset.
11. You can optionally associate the current Rebuildable Serial Number with a parent capital
asset or parent rebuildable.
Select an Asset Type. Valid values are Capital and Rebuildable Inventory.
If you selected a Capital Asset Type, optionally select a parent Asset Number. If you
m y
previously selected a Rebuildable Inventory Asset Type, optionally select a Rebuildable
Serial Number from the Asset Number list of values.
d e
If you selected a Capital Asset Type, optionally select a parent Asset Group. If you
previously selected a Rebuildable Inventory Asset Type, optionally select a Rebuildable ca
Item from the Asset Group list of values.

e A
c l
12. The Checked Out check box indicates whether the current asset is checked in or out. You
can check out an asset to view asset details, enter collection plan data, enter meter

r a
information, and optionally create a Work Request, within Maintenance Super User. This
check box is protected against update.
O ly
16. Within the Location tab, the Subinventory and Locator fields are view-only, displaying

l & On
the subinventory location of this asset within Inventory and its Locator segments. If this
asset if received into Inventory, these fields are populated.

n a e
17. Select a Location Code to specify a physical location for this asset. The Address field

t e r U s
simultaneously populates with the selected Location Code's associated Address. The
previously defined Area is organization-specific and not associated to a physical location.

I n
Valid Location Codes are defined within Install Base.
18. The Address defaults as the populated Location Code's associated address. You can

l e
optionally select a different address. If the current asset is in stores, the address of the

c
Location's organization appears.

r a19. Select a Production Organization. The list of values displays the production inventory
organizations maintained by the current asset's organization.
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 121
20. Select an Equipment Item. This is mandatory if you populated the Production
Organization field. Items that were defined with an equipment template, or with the
Equipment item attribute enabled are available.
21. Enter an Equipment Serial Number. This is mandatory if you populated the Production
Organization field. This is the specific name of the component within the Equipment
Type, defined above.
22. Select the Others tab to optionally enter the Fixed Asset region information, if Oracle
Fixed Assets is installed. This is Enterprise Asset Management's integration with Fixed
Assets. Enter a Category, which is a grouping of fixed assets, defined within Oracle
Fixed Assets. This category is tied to a set of books, and must be the same set of books
that is assigned to the current Enterprise Asset Management organization.
23. Enter the Number if Oracle Fixed Assets is installed. This represents a fixed Asset
Number that belongs to a fixed asset category, associated with the asset.
24. The Property Management fields, Location Name and Location Code, default from a
Property Manager export process (Export Locations to Enterprise Asset Management), if
Oracle Property Management is installed. These fields are disabled. These values cannot
be changed.
25. Before the above information is passed from Property Manager into Enterprise Asset
Management, Asset Groups (Rebuildable Items) need to first be established.
26. Optionally choose Location Details to view or update Property Manager field
information.
27. Save your work.
m y
28. Optionally select Attributes to enter attribute values for the asset. Existing, enabled
Attribute Groups appear. These Attribute Groups are optional. You do not need to enter
d e
values for all existing Attribute Groups. From this window, you cannot generate Attribute
Groups.
ca
29. Optionally choose Meters to associate the current Rebuildable Serial Number to one or

e A
more meters.

c l
30. Optionally choose Associate Activity to associate the current Rebuildable Serial Number
to an Activity.
r a
O ly
Note: To establish this Rebuildable Serial Number in Inventory, you must execute a
Miscellaneous Receipt process.

& On
Rebuildable Item and Activity Association
l
n a e
After you have defined Rebuildable Items and Activities, you can associate Activities to the
Rebuildable Items. For example, you may have a Rebuild Engine Activity, and an Engine

t e r U s
Rebuildable Item. After you create a Rebuild Work Order for the engine, the associated
Rebuild Engine Activity attaches its associated maintenance BOM (material) and maintenance

I n
routing (resources) to the Work Order.
Activity association for Rebuildable Serial Numbers are streamlined by using Activity

l e
Association Templates. If an Activity Template is defined for a Rebuildable Item, the

c
activity association automatically creates when a new Serial Number is created for that

r a Item, within the maintenance organization.


To associate Rebuildable Items with Activities:
O 1. Navigate to the Activity Association window.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 122
2. Select an Activity.
3. Within the Main tab, select Rebuildable from the Item Type list of values.
4. Select a Rebuildable Item from the Asset Group list of values.
5. If the Rebuildable Item is serial number controlled, select a Rebuildable Serial Number
from the Asset Number list of values.
6. Select a Priority Code. This field is for information purposes.
7. Enter Effective Dates. If the Effective From field is left blank, the system date defaults. If
the Effective To field is left blank, it defaults as NULL.
8. Within the Activity tab, the Activity Cause defaults from the Activity definition,
specifying what situation caused this work to generate. For example, Breakdown,
Vandalism, Normal Wear, or Settings. Optionally you can select an Activity Cause.
9. The Activity Type defaults from the Activity definition. This code indicates the type of
maintenance activity needed to perform for this Activity. It is used when defining a job or
a standard job. It should remain generic, and should not describe the job in detail. For
example, Inspection, Overhaul, Lubrication, Repair, Servicing or Cleaning. Optionally
select an Activity Type.
10. Optionally select the Tagging Required check box to indicate whether tag out procedures
are required.
11. The Owning Department field is used when associating Asset Numbers to Activities.
12. Save your work.
Defining Rebuildable Bills of Material
m y
You can identify and select the required items that make up a Rebuildable Serial Number. A
bill of material (BOM) is used to list all items and components that make up a particular asset
d e
or rebuildable, and is defined for each Rebuildable Item. The items defined on a Rebuildable
BOM are standard inventory components and/or non-inventory, direct items.
ca
If you are not using Project Manufacturing applications, Project Parameters are defined

e A
c l
for your eAM enabled organization to successfully create Rebuildable Items. This is
required because a Rebuildable BOM is of type Model and Unit Effective and this BOM

r a
type is currently allowed if PJM organization parameters are set up for the eAM enabled
organization to which the Rebuildable Item has been assigned. To define Project

O ly
Parameters, open the Project Parameters window using Project Manufacturing Super
User responsibility and without entering any data in the window, save the record.
To set up a rebuildable BOM:
l & On
a e
1. Navigate to the Bills of Material window.

n
t e r U s
2. Select a Rebuildable Item from the Item list of values.
3. Within the Main tab, the Item Sequence and Operation Sequence values default.

Number.
I n
4. Enter the inventory or non-inventory Component to make up the Rebuildable Serial

l e
5. Enter the Quantity of that component necessary for the Rebuildable Serial Number.

c
6. Save your work.

r a
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

OEnterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Rebuildable Item


Setup
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 123
Practice - Defining Rebuildable Items
Overview
Items that are installed, removed, and refurbished are referred to as Rebuildable Items. Examples
of Rebuildable Items include motors, control boxes, and computer boards. Rebuildable Items
might need to be removed or refurbished while a parent Asset is maintained. Rebuildable Items
are inventory items; you have the option to serialize them.

In this practice, you will create a Rebuildable Item, XX 3428 ENGINE.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

You have completed all previous practices


m y
Tasks
d e
Create a rebuildable item
ca
1.
e
Enter the following information, within the Master Item window: A
Item = XX 3428 ENGINE
Description = XX 3428 ENGINE c l
Template = @Rebuildable
r a
3. O ly
Enter the following information in the Serial Generation region:
Generation = Predefined
l & On
Starting Prefix = XX-ENGINE
Starting Number = 1000
n a e
4.
t e r U s
Select the Service tab on the Master Item window and select the Track in Installed Base
option.
I n
5.
e
Assign the rebuildable item to EM1 organization

c l
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 124
Solution - Defining Rebuildable Items
Create a rebuildable item

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Master Item window.

(N) Rebuildables > Rebuildable Items

2. Enter the following information:


Item = XX 3428 ENGINE
Description = XX 3428 ENGINE
Template = @Rebuildable

3. Enter the following information in the Serial Generation region:


Generation = Predefined
Starting Prefix = XX-ENGINE
Starting Number = 1000

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
4. (I) Save
l & On
a e
Select the track in installed base option
n
5.
e r s
Navigate to Tools > Item Details
t U
6.
I n
Select the Service tab.

7.
l e
Select the Track in Installed Base check box in the Installed Base region.

c
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 125
m y
Assign the rebuildable item to EM1 organization
d e
8. Select the Organization Assignment icon.
ca
9. Select the Assigned check box for the EM1 organization.

e A
10. (I) Save
c l
11. Close the window.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 126
Practice - Defining Rebuildable Serial Numbers
Overview
Rebuildables can be serialized or non-serialized. Non-Serialized Rebuildables are defined in the
transactions window. Serialized Rebuildables are defined using the Rebuildable Serial Numbers
window. You can define Serialized Rebuildables and also enter an owning department,
criticality, area and WIP accounting class for the same. You can specify a subinventory and
locator code to instantiate the unit. Instantiation is a miscellaneous receipt transaction that brings
the item into the subinventory and/or locator specified. This transaction inherits the Rebuildable
Items activity, meter and Preventive Maintenance (PM) associations for the unit. You can then
attach the Serialized Rebuildable to a parent asset or Rebuildable Item. Rebuildable Items can be
assigned three statuses: Defined but not used, Resides in stores, and Issued out of stores.In this
practice, you will define three Serialized Rebuildables and then view their on-hand quantities.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

m y
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
d e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations
ca
You have completed all previous practices

e A
Tasks
c l
Define first rebuildable serial number
r a
1. O ly
Enter the following information, within the Define Rebuildable Serial Number window:

l & On
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 1
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
a e
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
n
is enabled)
t e r U s
Asset Serial Number = XX-ENGINE-1001 (defaulted because automatic generation

I n
Description = 3428 ENGINE 1
Asset Category = Maintenance Supply.Supply

l e
Owning Department = XX MAINT

c
Criticality = Low

r a WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC


Area = XX MINING
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 127
2. (I) Save.

3. Enter the following information, within the Parent region:


Asset Number = XX-1000

4. (I) Save.

Define second serialized rebuildable

5. Enter the following information, within the Define Rebuildable Serial Number window:
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 2
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
Asset Number = XX-ENGINE-1002 (defaulted because automatic generation is
enabled)
Description = 3428 ENGINE 2
Department = XX MAINT
Criticality = Low
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Area = XX MINING
Organization: EM1

6. (I) Save.
m y
Define third serialized rebuildable
d e
7. Enter the following information, within the Define Rebuildable Serial Number window:
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 3
ca
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
e A
c l
Asset Number = XX-ENGINE-1003 (defaulted because automatic generation is
enabled)
Description = 3428 ENGINE 3
r a
O ly
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Criticality = Low

l & On
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Area = XX MINING

n a e
8. (I) Save.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 128
View the quantities on-hand

9. Enter the following information, within the Query Material window:


Item/Revision = XX 3428 ENGINE

10. (B) Find

11. Open the Nodes and view the On Hand information.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 129
Solution - Defining Rebuildable Serial Numbers
Define first rebuildable serial number

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Define Rebuildable Serial Number window.

(N) Rebuildables > Rebuildable Numbers

2. Enter the following information:


Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 1
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
Asset Serial Number = XX-ENGINE-1001 (defaulted because automatic generation
is enabled)
Asset Category = Maintenance Supply.Supply
Description = 3428 ENGINE 1
Organization: EM1
Department = XX MAINT
Criticality = Low
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Area = XX MINING
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
3.
l e
(I) Save.
c
r
4.
a Enter the following information, within the Parent region:
Asset Number = XX-1000
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 130
5. (I) Save.

Define second serialized rebuildable


m y
6. (I) New
d e
7. Enter the following information:
ca
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 2
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
e A
l
Asset Serial Number = XX-ENGINE-1002 (defaulted because automatic generation
c
a
is enabled)

Description = 3428 ENGINE 2


Department = XX MAINT
r
Asset Category = Maintenance Supply.Supply

O ly
Criticality = Low
l & On
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Area = XX MINING
n a e
t e r U s
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory

8. (I) Save.
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 131
Define third serialized rebuildable

9. (I) New
m y
10. Enter the following information:
d e
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 3
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
ca
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE

e
Asset Number = XX-ENGINE-1003 (defaulted because automatic generation is A
enabled)
c l
Description = 3428 ENGINE 3
r a
Asset Category = Maintenance Supply.Supply

Owning Department = XX MAINT


Criticality = Low O ly
l & On
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Area = XX MINING

n a e
11. (I) Save.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 132
12. (I) Save

View the quantities on-hand


m y
13. Navigate to the Query Material window.
d e
(N) Inventory > On-hand, Availability > On-hand Quantity
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 133
14. Select XX 3428 ENGINE, from the Item/Revision list of values.

m y
d e
ca
15. (B) Find

e A
c l
16. Open the Nodes and view the On Hand information.

17. Close the window.


r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 134
Practice - Viewing Asset Details using the Maintenance
Workbench
Overview
Using the Maintenance Workbench, you can query Asset Numbers that you would like to view
associated details, hierarchal information, cost information, associated work and service requests,
enter and view meter readings, and Quality information. You can use a Simple or Advanced
Search to obtain your desired Asset Numbers.

In this practice, you will use the Maintenance Workbench to view your assets details.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations


m y
You have completed all previous practices
d e
Tasks
ca
View asset details

e A
1.
c l
Within the Maintenance Workbench, enter EM1 in the Organization field.

2.
r a
Perform an advanced search for Asset Group, XX EQUIPMENT.

3. O ly
Select XX-1000 and view its hierarchy.

4.
l
View its configuration history.& On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 135
Solution Viewing Asset Details using the Maintenance
Workbench
View asset details

Responsibility = Maintenance Super User, Vision Operations

1. Enter EM1 in the Organization field.

2. (B) Go

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
3. Select the Assets tab.
r a
4. (B) Advanced Search
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 136
5. Enter XX EQUIPMENT in the Asset Group field.

6. (B) Go
m y
7. Select XX-1000.
d e
8. Select Hierarchy, from the Select Asset Number: list of values.
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
9. (B) Go
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 137
10. Select Configuration History, from the list of values.

11. (B) Go

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 138
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 139
Non-Stock Direct Items

m y
d e
ca
e A
Non-Stock Direct Items

c l
Non-Stock Direct Items can represent items that are not stocked in inventory, such as services

r a
that are purchased from a supplier. Non-Stock Direct Items are not stocked in inventory; they
are defined in the Item Master as an inventory item, Purchased, Purchasable, and the Stockable
O ly
check box cleared. These items are contrived as one off, bought directly from a vendor for a

maintenance Work Order execution.


l & On
specific Work Order and Operation. These items are delivered directly to the Shop Floor for

a e
You can add Non-Stock and Description Based Direct Items to Maintenance Bills of Material,
n
t e r U s
as well as add them directly to the material requirements for an existing Work Order.
To set up Non-Stock Direct Items, access the Master Item window within Oracle Inventory,

I n
and apply the @Non Stocked Item template. Description Based Direct Items are not set up
within Oracle Inventory.

l e
If direct items exist on a Bill of Material, they default as material requirements when creating a

c
Work Order for that asset; however, you can add additional direct item material requirements

r a
to an existing Work Order.
To set up a Non-Stock Direct Item:
O 1. Navigate to the Master Item window.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 140
2. Enter the non-stock direct Item name.
3. Enter a Description.
4. From the Tools menu, select Copy From.
5. Select the @Non-Stocked Item Template.
6. Choose Apply.
7. Choose Done.
8. Save your work. The Stockable check box is clear and the Purchased and Purchasable
check boxes are selected.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Non-Stock Direct
Item Setup

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 141
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 142
Activities

m y
d e
ca
e A
Activities

c l
Activities provide you with a standard template of jobs, which are applied to Work Orders,

r a
such as Routine or Preventive Maintenance. After these Activity Templates are created, they
are associated with one or more Asset Numbers or Rebuildables. They are also associated with
O ly
a maintenance BOM and maintenance routing, containing the material and resources needed

l & On
for operations, respectively. When Work Orders are created for assets associated to the
Activity, the material and resources associated with the current Activity automatically copy to
the Work Orders created.

n a e
r s
There are three methods you can use to create an Activity. You can create an Activity within

e
the Master Activity (Master Item) window, create Activities from the Activity Workbench, and
t U
create Activities from within a Maintenance Work Order.

I n
To set up Activities within the Master Activity window:

l e
1. Navigate to the Activity window. The Master Item window is used to create Asset

c
Groups, Activities, and rebuildable.

r a
2. Enter the name of the Activity in the Item field.

O
3. Enter a Description for this Activity, up to 240 characters.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 143
4. Use the @Activity template to quickly apply attribute values, and to ensure that the
appropriate attributes are applied.
5. Select the Asset Management tab.
In the Activity Property region, optionally enter an Activity Type to indicate the type of
maintenance for this Activity. It is used when defining a Work Order. It should remain
generic, and should not describe the job in detail. For example, Inspection, Overhaul,
Lubrication, Repair, Servicing, or Cleaning.
6. Select an Activity Cause to specify what situation caused this work to generate. For
example, Breakdown, Vandalism, Normal Wear, or Settings.
7. Select an Activity Source. Activity Source codes are reasons activities are executed. For
example, Warranty Compliance, OSHA Compliance, or Military Specification
Requirements.
8. Select a Shutdown Type. This indicates whether a shutdown is necessary to perform this
maintenance activity. For example Required, and Not Required. This field is for
information purposes.
9. Select an Activity Notification Required value to indicate whether the asset requiring
work is mobile, and should be brought into the shop for repairs. This field is for
information purposes.
10. Select the paperclip Attachments icon to attach relevant documents, such as drawings,
standard procedures, and reference guides, to this Activity. You can attach file, URL, and
text attachments.
11. Save your work. After saving your work, this Activity can associate with an asset.
m y
To associate Activities with multiple organizations:
d e
1. From the Master Item window, select TOOLS from the Tools menu.
2. Select Organization Assignment.
ca
3. Enter additional organizations in the available window.

e A
4. Save your work.

c l
Multiple Work Orders associated with the same Activity cannot be at a Released status,
at the same time.
r a
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
O ly
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Defining Activities

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 144
Practice - Defining Activities
Overview
Activities provide you with a standard template of jobs, which are applied to Work Orders, such
as Routine or Preventive Maintenance. After these Activity Templates are created, they are
associated with one or more Asset Numbers or Rebuildables. They are also associated with a
maintenance BOM and activity routing, containing the materials and resources needed for
operations, respectively. When Work Orders are created for assets associated with the Activity,
the material and resources associated with the current Activity automatically copy to the Work
Orders created. There are three methods you can use to create an Activity. You can create an
Activity within the Master Activity (Master Item) window, create Activities from the Activity
Workbench, and create Activities from within a Maintenance Work Order.

In this practice, you will create an asset activity, XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT, and a
rebuild activity, XX ENGINE REBUILD.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor


might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1


m y
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
d e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations
ca

e A
l
You have completed all previous practices

c
Tasks
r a
Create an asset activity
O ly
1.
& On
Enter the following information, within the Master Item window:
l
Item = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
a e
Description = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
n
2.
t e r
Apply the @Activity template.
U s
3.
I n
Select the Asset Management tab and enter the following information:
Activity Type = Maintenance
l e
Shutdown Type = Required
c
Activity Cause = Preventive

r a Activity Source = Routine

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 145
Assign the asset activity to EM1 organization

Create a rebuild activity

4. Enter the following information, within the Master Item window:


Item = XX ENGINE REBUILD
Description = XX ENGINE REBUILD

5. Apply the @Activity template.

6. Select the Asset Management tab and enter the following information:
Activity Type = Rebuild
Shutdown Type = Required
Activity Cause = Normal Wear
Activity Source = Routine

Assign the rebuild activity to EM1 organization

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 146
Solution - Defining Activities
Create an asset activity

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Master Item window.

(N) Activities > Master Activities

2. Enter the following information:


Organization = V1 Vision Operations
Item = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
Description = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT

3. (I) Save.

4. Apply the @Activity template.

(M) Tools > Copy From

Select @Activity from the Template list of values.

m y
(B) Apply (B) Done

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a The following attributes applied:

O Main Tab

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 147
Field Value
User Item Type Asset Activity
Item Status Active

Inventory Tab
Field Value
Inventory Item Enabled

Asset Management Tab


Field Value
Asset Item Type Asset Activity

5. Select the Asset Management tab and enter the following information:
Activity Type = Maintenance
Shutdown Type = Required
Activity Cause = Preventive
Activity Source = Routine

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
6. (I) Save
I n
l e
Assign the asset activity to EM1 organization

c
7.

r a (I) Organization Assignment

O8. Select the Assigned check box for the EM1 organization.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 148
9. (I) Save

10. Close the window.

Create a rebuild activity

11. Navigate to the Master Item window.

(N) Activities > Master Activities

12. Enter the following information:


Item = XX ENGINE REBUILD
Description = XX ENGINE REBUILD

13. (I) Save

14. Apply the @Activity template.

(M) Tools > Copy From

Select @Activity from the Template list of values.

(B) Apply (B) Done

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 149
The following attributes applied:

Main Tab
Field Value
User Item Type Asset Activity
Item Status Active

Inventory Tab
Field Value
Inventory Item Enabled

Asset Management Tab


Field Value
Asset Item Type Asset Activity

15. Select the Asset Management tab and enter the following information:
Activity Type = Rebuild
Shutdown Type = Required
Activity Cause = Normal Wear
Activity Source = Routine
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
16. (I) Save

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 150
Assign the rebuild activity to EM1 organization

17. Select the Organization Assignment tab.

18. Select the Assigned check box for the EM1 organization.

19. (I) Save

20. Close the window.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 151
Activity Association

m y
d e
ca
e A
Activity Association

c l
After you have defined Asset Groups, Assets, and Activities, you can associate the Activities

r a
with assets and or rebuildables. You can streamline the creation of Activities and associations
using an Activity Association Template. Assets are associated with Activities before entering
O ly
the Activity into a Preventive Maintenance Schedule.

l & On
Note: The Activity Workbench lets you streamline your Activity setups, including Asset
Number and Activity associations. Also, you can streamline the creation of Activity
a e
associations using an Activity Association Template. For example, when you create an
n
r s
Asset Group, and then Asset Numbers within that group, you do not need to utilize the

e
Association window to associate those Asset Numbers with an Activity. If you create an
t U
Activity Association Template, the Activity that you associate with the current Asset

I n
Number's Asset Group automatically determines the Activity that is associated with the

c l e
current Asset Number.
To associate Assets with Activities:

r a
1. Navigate to the Activity Association window.
2. Select an Activity.
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 152
3. Within the Main tab, select Asset or Rebuildable from the Item Type list of values. This
field works directly with the Asset Group and Asset Item fields. If Asset is selected, the
Asset Group refers to the Asset Group, and the Asset Number refers to the Asset
Number. If Rebuildable is selected, the Asset Group refers to the Rebuildable Item, and
the Asset Number refers to the specific serial numbers for the current Rebuildable Item.
4. Select an Asset Group. If Asset is populated in the Item Type field, Asset Groups are
available.
5. Select an Asset Number. Asset Numbers associated with the previously selected Asset
Group are available. Asset Numbers are always serial controlled. If you had selected a
Non-serialized Rebuildable in the Asset Group field, then an Asset Number value is not
required.
6. Select a Priority Code. This field is for information purposes.
7. Enter Effective Dates. If the Effective From field is left blank, then it defaults to the
system date. If the Effective To field is left blank, then it defaults to NULL.
8. Within the Work Order Defaults tab, the Activity Cause defaults from the Activity
definition, specifying what situation caused this work to generate. For example,
Breakdown, Vandalism, Normal Wear, or Settings. Optionally you can select an Activity
Cause.
9. The Activity Type defaults from the Activity definition. This code indicates the type of
maintenance activity to perform for this Activity. It is used when defining a job or a
standard job. This code must be generic, and must not describe the job in detail. For
example, Inspection, Overhaul, Lubrication, Repair, Servicing, or Cleaning. Optionally,
m y
you can select an Activity Type.
10. Select the Tagging Required check box to indicate whether tag out procedures are
d e
required. The Area may need securing for operations required for carrying out a Work

c
Order. Tags are generally printed and placed on an asset, warning the plant that the asseta
is shutdown, and should not be started. This check box helps the planner isolate those

e
jobs that require a tagout. This field is is for information purpose only. A
c l
11. The Owning Department responsible for this activity or asset defaults from the Asset

Planner or Supervisor.
r a
Number definition. Optionally, you can select an Owning Department. This is normally a

O ly
12. Select a Shutdown Type. This indicates whether a shutdown is necessary to perform this

& On
maintenance activity. For example Required or Not Required. This field is for

l
information purposes. This value defaults from the Master Activity information that was

a e
created within the Master Item window.

r n
13. Select a WIP Accounting Class. You can update the value that defaults from the
s
e
Enterprise Asset Management Parameters information, for the current organization.

t U
14. Select an Activity Source. Activity Source codes are reasons activities are performed. For
n
e I
example, Warranty Compliance, OSHA Compliance, or Military Specification
Requirements. This value defaults from the Master Activity information that was created

l
within the Master Item window.
c
r a
15. Save your work.
Activity Association Templates

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 153
Activities provide you with a standard template of jobs that are applied to Work Orders, such
as Routine or Preventive Maintenance. After these Activity Templates are created, they are
associated with one or more Asset Numbers or Rebuildables. They are also associated to a
maintenance BOM and activity routing, containing the materials and resources needed for
operations, respectively. When Work Orders are created for assets associated to the Activity,
the material and resources associated with the current Activity automatically copy to the Work
Orders created.
You can streamline the creation of Activity associations using an Activity Association
Template. For example, when you create an Asset Group, and then Asset Numbers within that
group, you do not need to utilize the Association window to associate those Asset Numbers
with an Activity. If you create an Activity Association Template, the Activity that you
associate with the current Asset Number's Asset Group automatically determines the Activity
that is associated with the current Asset Number.
Note: The Activity Workbench is generally used to streamline your Activity setups,
including Activity Association Templates.
To create activity templates:
1. Navigate to the Activity Association Template window.
2. Select a valid Activity. The Activity needs to already have been created within the Master
Item window.
3. Within the Main tab, select an Item Type of Asset or Rebuildable.
4. Select an Asset Group. After this record is saved, this Asset Group is associated with the
current Activity. Every Asset Number created within the current Asset Group is
m y
automatically associated with the current Activity.
5. Select a Priority code. This value defaults from the Master Activity information created
d e
within the Master Item window.
6. Enter Effectivity Dates for this Activity Template. ca
7. Within the Work Order Defaults tab, select an Activity Cause. This value specifies what
e A
c l
situation caused this work to generate. For example, Breakdown, Vandalism, Normal
Wear, or Settings.This value defaults from the Master Activity information created within
the Master Item window.
r a
O ly
8. Select an Activity Type to indicate the type of maintenance for this Activity. It is used
when defining a Work Order. It must be generic and must not describe the job in detail.

l & On
For example, Inspection, Overhaul, Lubrication, Repair, Servicing, or Cleaning. This
value defaults from the Master Activity information created within the Master Item
window.
n a e
t e r U s
9. Select the Tagging Required check box to indicate whether tag out procedures are
required. The Area might need to be secured for operations required for carrying out a

I n
Work Order. Tags are generally printed and placed on an asset, warning the plant that the
asset is shutdown, and should not be started. This check box helps the planner isolate

c l e
those jobs that require a tagout. This is for information purposes only.
10. Select an Owning Department. This value defaults from the Enterprise Asset

r a Management Parameters information for the current organization.


11. Optionally select a Shutdown Type to indicate whether a shutdown is necessary to
O perform this maintenance activity. For example Required, and Not Required. This field is

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 154
for information purposes. This value defaults from the Master Activity information that
was created within the Master Item window.
12. Select a WIP Accounting Class. This value defaults from the Enterprise Asset
Management Parameters information for the current organization.
13. Select an Activity Source. Activity Source codes are reasons activities are executed. For
example, Warranty Compliance, OSHA Compliance, or Military Specification
Requirements. This value defaults from the Master Activity information that was created
within the Master Item window.
14. Save your work.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Asset Setup >
Activity Association Templates

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 155
Practice - Associating Assets with Activities
Overview
After you have defined Asset Groups, Asset Numbers, and Activities, you can associate the
Activities with assets and/or rebuildables. However, you can streamline the creation of Activities
and associations using an Activity Association Template. Assets are associated with Activities
before entering the Activity into a Preventive Maintenance Schedule.

You can streamline the creation of Activity associations using an Activity Association Template.
For example, when you create an Asset Group, and then Asset Numbers within that group, you
do not need to utilize the Association window to associate those Asset Numbers with an Activity.
If you create an Activity Association Template, the Activity that you associate with the current
Asset Numbers Asset Group automatically determines the Activity that is associated with the
current Asset Number.

In this practice, you will associate assets with activities. You will then associate an Asset Group
with an Activity by using a template.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use
m y
Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1
d e
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
ca

e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations A
c l
a
You have completed all previous practices

r
Tasks
O ly
& On
Associate asset numbers with an activity using the Activity Association window
l
1.
a e
Enter the following information, within the Activity Association window:
n
e r
Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
Asset Type = Capital
t U s
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT

I n
Asset Number = XX-1000

c l e
Priority = High

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 156
2. Select the Work Order Defaults tab and notice that the following information defaulted from
the Activitys definition:
Activity Cause = Preventive
Activity Type = Maintenance
Tagging Required = Optional (check box is clear)
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Shutdown Type = Required
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Activity Source = Routine

3. Enter the following information on the second line:


Asset Type = Capital
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Number = XX-1002
Priority = High

Associate rebuildable serial numbers with an activity using the Activity


Association window

4. Enter the following information, within the Activity Association window:


Activity = XX ENGINE REBUILD
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE m y
Asset Number = XX-ENGINE-1000
d e
Priority = High

ca
5.
A
Select the Work Order Defaults tab and notice that the following information defaulted from
the Activitys definition:
e
Activity Cause = Normal Wear
Activity Type = Rebuild
c l
r a
Tagging Required = Optional (check box is clear)

O ly
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Shutdown Type = Required

l
Activity Source = Routine& On
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC

n a e
6.

t e r s
Enter the following information on the second line:
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
U
I n
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
Asset Number = XX-ENGINE-1001

c l e
Priority = High

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 157
7. Enter the following information on the third line:
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
Asset Number = XX-ENGINE-1002
Priority = High

Create an activity association using an activity association template

8. Enter the following information, within the Activity Association Template window:
Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
Asset Type = Capital
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Priority = High

9. The information that is within the Work Order Defaults tab defaults from the Activity
definition (Master Item window).

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 158
Solution Associating Assets with Activities
Associate asset numbers with an activity using the Activity Association window

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Activity Association window.

(N) Activities > Activity Association

2. Enter the following information:


Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
Asset Type = Capital
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Number = XX-1000
Priority = High

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
3.

t e r
the Activitys definition:
U s
Select the Work Order Defaults tab and notice that the following information defaulted from

I n
Activity Cause = Preventive
Activity Type = Maintenance

l e
Tagging Required = Optional (check box is clear)

c
Owning Department = XX MAINT

r a Shutdown Type = Required


WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
O Activity Source = Routine

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 159
4. Select the Main tab.

5. Enter the following information on the second line:


Asset Type = Capital
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Asset Number = XX-1002
Priority = High

m y
d e
ca
6. (I) Save

e A
7. Close the window.
c l
r a
Associate rebuildable serial numbers with an activity using the Activity
Association window
O ly
8.
& On
Navigate to the Activity Association window.

l

a e
(N) Activities > Activity Association
n
9.
e r s
Enter the following information:

t U
Activity = XX ENGINE REBUILD

I n
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE

l e
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 1
c
Priority = High

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 160
10. Select the Work Order Defaults tab and notice that the following information defaulted from
the Activitys definition:
Activity Cause = Normal Wear
Activity Type = Rebuild
m y
Tagging Required = Optional (check box is clear)
d e
Owning Department = XX MAINT
Shutdown Type = Required
ca
WIP Accounting Class = XX eAM ACC
Activity Source = Routine
e A
11. Select the Main tab.
c l
r a
O ly
12. (I) New

l & On
13. Enter the following information on the second line:
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory

a e
Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE
n
Priority = High
t e r
Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 2

U s
14. (I) New
I n
l e
15. Enter the following information on the third line:

c
Asset Type = Rebuildable Inventory

r a Asset Group = XX 3428 ENGINE


Asset Number = XX 3428 ENGINE 3
O Priority = High

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 161
16. (I) Save

17. Close the window.


m y
Create an activity association using an activity association template
d e
18. Navigate to the Activity Association Template window.
ca
(N) Activities > Activity Association Template

e A
19. Enter the following information:
c
Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENTl
Asset Type = Capital
r a
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT
Priority = High O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 162
20. The information that is within the Work Order Defaults tab defaults from the Activity
definition (Master Item window).

m y
e
21. (I) Save

22. Close the window.


a d
A c
c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 163
Activity Workbench

m y
d e
ca
e A
Activity Workbench

c l
You can use a central workbench to manage your organization's Activity functions. Using the

r a
Activity Workbench, you can view, create, query, and manage all of your Activities. From this
central workbench, you can view, create, and update Maintenance Routes, Maintenance Bills
O ly
of Material, Preventive Maintenance Schedules, and Suppressions associated with your

l & On
Activities. You can create various copy functions within a single Activity, across multiple
Activities, as well as between Work Orders and Activities or asset activity associations. You

a e
can view or update Last Service for the asset activity association, as well as view cost estimates

n
organization.
Defining Activities
t e r
for the Activity. These copy functions save time and standardize processes across your

U s
I n
There are three methods you can use to create an Activity. You can create an Activity within

c l e
the Master Activity (Master Item) window, create Activities from the Activity Workbench, and
create Activities from within a Maintenance Work Order.

r a
To set up Activities using the Activity Workbench:
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.
O 2. Choose Launch.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 164
3. To create an Activity, choose New.
4. Enter an Activity Name.
5. Enter an Activity Description.
6. Choose an activity Template. This automatically links the properties associated with an
Activity. The @Activity template is created for you. You can create your own Activity
Templates, as well.
7. Within the Activity Properties region, select an Activity Type. The value defaults from
the Template properties above.
8. Within the Activity Properties region, select a Shutdown Type. The Shutdown Type is
user-defined and indicates whether an Activity shutdown is required. For example, the
Shutdown Type can refer to whether the Asset Activity association shutdown is required
before the Activity is performed. The value defaults from the Template properties above.
This field is for information purposes.
9. Within the Activity Properties region, select an Activity Cause. The value defaults from
the Template properties above.
10. Within the Activity Properties region, select an Activity Source. The value defaults from
the Template properties above.
11. The Activity Notification check box is informational until a future release.
12. You can optionally create an Activity by copying it from another Activity or a Work
Order. Within the Copy Options region, select the entity to copy information from. Valid
values are Activity and Work Order. If you select Activity, then the values within the
Activity region are relevant. If you select Work Order, then the values within the Work
m y
Order region are relevant.
d e
Activity name. This is the Activity that you are copying from.
ca
13. Within the Activity region, if Activity is populated in the Copy From field, then select an

e
BOM check box to indicate that the Maintenance Bill of Material, associated with the A
14. Within the Activity region, if Activity is populated in the Copy From field, then select the

l
current Activity within the Activity region, copies to the new Activity Name.
c
r a
15. Within the Activity region, if Activity is populated in the Copy From field, then select the
Routing check box to indicate that routings, associated with the current Activity within

O ly
the Activity region, copies to the new Activity Name.
16. Within the Activity region, if Activity is populated in the Copy From field, then select

l & On
All or None from the Association list of values.

n a e
All: All Asset and Rebuildable associations, associated with the current Activity within
the Activity region, copy to the new Activity.

e r s
None: No Asset and Rebuildable associations, associated with the current Activity within

t U
the Activity region, copy to the new Activity.

I n
17. Within the Work Order region, if Work Order is populated in the Copy From field, then

c l e
select an existing maintenance Work Order.
18. Within the Work Order region, if Work Order is populated in the Copy From field, then

r a select All or None from the Operation list of values.


All: All operations associated with the current Work Order, populated in the Work Order

O field, copy to the new Activity.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 165
None: No operations associated with the current Work Order, populated in the Work
Order field, copy to the new Activity
19. Within the Work Order region, if Work Order is populated in the Copy From field, then
select All, Issued, or None from the Material list of values.
All: All material associated with the current Work Order, populated in the Work Order
field, copies to the new Activity.
Issued: Material issued to the current Work Order, populated in the Work Order field,
copies to the new Activity.
None: No material associated with the current Work Order, populated in the Work Order
field, copies to the new Activity.
20. Within the Work Order region, if Work Order is populated in the Copy From field, then
select All, Issued, or None from the Resource list of values.
All: All resources associated with the current Work Order copy to the new Activity.
Issued: Resources issued to the current Work Order copy to the new Activity.
None: No resources associated with the current Work Order copy to the new Activity.
21. Within the Work Order region, if Work Order is populated in the Copy From field, then
select None, Current, or All from the Association list of values.
None: No Assets and Rebuildables, associated with the current Work Order, associate
with the new Activity.
Current: An Asset and/or Rebuildable, associated with the current Work Order, associates
with the new Activity.
m y
All: All Assets and/or Rebuildables, associated with the current Work Order's Activity,
associate with the new Activity.
d e
22. Save your work. After saving, the new Activity is automatically assigned to the current
organization.
ca
Navigating the Activity Workbench

e A
c l
The Activity Workbench lets you manage all of your organization's Activity functions. Before
launching the Activity Workbench, you can narrow your data selection; the Activity

r a
Workbench provides a query capability as you enter the Activity Workbench. You can query
by Asset Type, Asset Number, Asset Group, Area, Asset Category, Owning Department, and
O ly
include children assets within asset hierarchies. The bottom portion of the window enables you

l & On
to query by Activity, Activity Type, Activity Source, Shutdown Type, and Activity Cause. You
can also select data that is between specified Effective dates.

a e
To navigate the Activity Workbench:
n
t e r U s
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.
2. Optionally narrow your data selection by selecting criteria within the Activity

I n
Workbench window. If you make selections, then you can view those selections after you
launch the Activity Workbench.

l e
3. Choose Launch.

c
4. Select the Results (Capital) tab.

r a
5. Expand the Results (Capital) folder.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 166
Expand the All Assets folder to display all Asset Numbers, based on your chosen
selection criteria. You can select an asset and view related Activity information within
the corresponding Activity Associations window. Within the corresponding Activity
Associations window, you can associate Activities with the current asset.
Expand the Assets with Activities folder to display all Asset Numbers that are currently
associated with one or more Activities, based on your chosen selection criteria. You can
select an asset and view its related Activity information within the corresponding Activity
Associations window. Within the corresponding Activity Associations window, you can
view, create, or update preventive maintenance schedule definitions, create or update
Suppression definitions, view or update last service information, view the parts list, and
view or update the maintenance routing.
Expand the Routes folder to display all Asset Routes that are currently associated with
one or more Activities, based on your chosen selection criteria. You can select an Asset
Route and view related Activity information within the corresponding Activity
Associations window.
6. Select the Results (Rebuildable Inventory) tab.
7. Expand the Results (Rebuildable Inventory) folder.
8. Expand the All Rebuildables folder.
Expand the Serialized folder to display all Rebuildable Serial Numbers, based on your
chosen selection criteria, within the Activity Workbench window. You can select a
Rebuildable Serial Number and view related Activity information within the
corresponding Activity Associations window. Within the corresponding Activity
m y
Associations window, you can associate Activities to the current Rebuildable Serial
Number.
d e
Expand the Non-serialized folder to display all Non-serialized Rebuildables, based on
your chosen selection criteria, within the Activity Workbench window. You can select a
ca
Non-serialized Rebuildable and view related Activity information within the

e
corresponding Activity Associations window. Within the corresponding Activity A
l
Associations window, you can associate Activities to the current Serialized Non-
c
a
rebuildable.
9.
r
Select the Rebuildables with Activities folder.

O ly
Expand the Serialized with Activities folder to display all Rebuildable Serial Numbers

& On
that are currently associated with one or more Activities, based on your chosen selection

l
criteria, within the Activity Workbench window. You can select a Rebuildable Serial

a e
Number and view related Activity information within the corresponding Activity

r n
Associations window. Within the corresponding Activity Associations window, you can

s
create or update preventive maintenance schedule definitions, create or update

t e U
Suppression definitions, view or update last service information, view the parts list, view

n
I
or update the maintenance routing, and view cost estimations for a Rebuildable Serial
Number and Activity combination.

l e
Expand the Non-serialized with Activities folder to display all Non-serialized

c
Rebuildables that are currently associated with one or more Activities, based on your

r a chosen selection criteria, within the Activity Workbench window. You can select a Non-
serialized Rebuildable and view related Activity information within the corresponding
O Activity Associations window. Within the corresponding Activity Associations window,

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 167
you can create or update preventive maintenance schedule definitions, create or update
Suppression definitions, view or update last service information, view the parts list, view
or update the maintenance routing, and view cost estimations for a Rebuildable Serial
Number and Activity combination.
10. Select the Results (Activities) tab.
11. Expand the All Activities folder to display all valid Activities, based on your chosen
selection criteria, within the Activity Workbench window. You can select an Activity and
view its related Activity information within the corresponding Activity Associations
window, if an association exists. You can associate an Asset Number with the current,
selected Activity using the corresponding Activity Associations window. You can select
an Activity within the Activity Workbench pane, and then view its related information
within the corresponding Activity Associations window. For a selected Activity, you can
create a new Activity, create or update its associated Maintenance Routing, create or
update the associated Maintenance BOM, and view cost estimations.
12. Expand the Activities with Association folder to display all Activities that are associated
with an Asset Number, based on your chosen selection criteria, within the Activity
Workbench window. You can select an Activity within the Activity Workbench pane,
and then view its related information within the corresponding Activity Associations
window. For a selected Activity, you can create a new Activity, create or update its
associated Maintenance Routing, create or update the associated Maintenance BOM, and
view cost estimations.
To create or update a PM schedule definition:
You can view, create or update a Preventive Maintenance (PM) Schedule definition for
m y
Activity/Asset Number and Activity/Asset Route combinations.
d e
1. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select any one of the tabs: Results (Capital),
Results (Rebuildable Inventory), or Results (Activities).
ca
e
then select an Asset Number or Route, respectively. You cannot create or update a PM A
2. If you select Results (Capital), expand either the Assets with Activities or Routes folders,

l
Schedule definition for an Asset Number that is not associated with an Activity. If you
c
a
select Results (Rebuildable Inventory), then expand the Rebuildables with Activities

r
folder, expand either the Serialized with Activities or Non-serialized with Activities

O ly
folder, then select a Serialized or Non-serialized Rebuildable, respectively. You cannot
create or update a PM Schedule definition for an Asset Number that is not associated

l & On
with an Activity. If you select Results (Activities), then expand the Activities with
Association folder, then select an Activity.

n a e
3. Choose Preventive Maintenance. The PM Schedules window displays all PM Schedule

combination.
t e r U s
definitions for the current Activity and Asset Number or Activity and Asset Route

I n
Choose New to create a new PM Schedule definition.
Choose Last Service Information to create or update Last Service Information.

l e
Choose Suppression to create or update a suppression definition, associated with the
c
current Activity and Asset Number or Activity and Asset Route combination.

r a
Select a PM Schedule definition, and then choose Open to view its details.

O 4. Close the window.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 168
5. Save your work.
To create or update an activity suppression:
You can view, create, or update suppression definitions for Activity and Asset Number or
Activity and Asset Route combinations.
1. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select any one of the tabs: Results (Assets), Results
(Rebuildables), or Results (Activities).
2. If you select Results (Assets), then expand either the Assets with Activities or Routes
folders, then select the Asset Number or Route, respectively. You cannot create or update
a suppression definition for a Asset Number that is not associated with an Activity. If you
select Results (Rebuildables), then expand the Rebuildables with Activities folder,
expand either the Serialized with Activities or Non-serialized with Activities folder, then
select a Serialized or Non-serialized Rebuildable, respectively. You cannot create or
update a suppression definition for a Asset Number that is not associated with an
Activity. If you select Results (Activities), then expand the Activities with Association
folder, then select an Activity.
3. Choose Suppression.
4. Add or update the Suppression Activity associated with the current Activity.
5. Save your work.
To view or update last service information:
You can view or update last service information for Activity and Asset Number or
Activity and Asset Route combinations.
1. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select any one of the tabs: Results (Assets), Results
m y
(Rebuildables), or Results (Activities).
d e
2. If you select Results (Assets), then expand either the Assets with Activities or Routes
folders, then select the Asset Number or Route, respectively. If you select Results
ca
(Rebuildables), then expand the Rebuildables with Activities folder, then expand either

e A
the Serialized with Activities or Non-serialized with Activities folder, and finally select a

c l
Serialized or Non-serialized Rebuildable, respectively. If you select Results (Activities),
then expand the Activities with Association folder, then select an Activity.

r a
3. Choose Last Service to view or update last service information.
4. Save your work.
O ly
l & On
To view estimated cost information:
You can view estimated cost information for an Activity. Estimating Activity costs is often

a e
necessary for planning and budgeting purposes.

n
t e r s
1. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select any one of the tabs: Results (Assets), Results
(Rebuildables), or Results (Activities).
U
I n
2. If you select Results (Assets), then expand either the Assets with Activities or Routes
folders, then select the Asset Number or Route, respectively. If you select Results

l e
(Rebuildables), then expand the Rebuildables with Activities folder, expand either the

c
Serialized with Activities or Non-serialized with Activities folder, and finally select a

r a Serialized or Non-serialized Rebuildable, respectively. If you select Results (Activities),


then expand the Activities with Association folder, then select an Activity.

O 3. Choose Cost Estimate to view the Activity's cost estimation information.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 169
To define a maintenance route:
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.
2. Choose Launch.
3. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select the Activity for which you wish to create the
Routing.
4. Choose Routing.
5. Select an Activity from the Item list of values.
6. Within the Main tab, enter an operation Sequence or let the system automatically
generate it for you, according to your profile setup.
7. To copy or reference standard operations into a routing, use the operation Code list of
values. You can define a new standard operation by selecting Standard Operations from
the Tools menu. If you use a standard operation code, the operation information for that
code is copied into the current operation. You can then update that information as
desired.
8. Select a Department where the operation is performed.
9. Select the Referenced check box to indicate that any changes to standard operations are
reflected in the routing. If the standard operation is selected, this check box is selected by
default.
10. The Effective date defaults to the system date, but you can optionally change this.
11. Enter a Disabled date to indicate the current operation's expiration.
12. Select the Description tab. Enter a Description for the current operation.
m y
13. Choose Routing Network to view the operation dependencies for the current asset route.
You can schedule operations to execute in parallel, sequence, or through dependent steps.
d e
The operation numbers identify the sequence that they are performed.
ca
14. Select an operation, then choose Operation Resources to view the resources associated
with the current department attached to this operation. Optionally, you can modify the

e A
resources listed.
15. Save your work.
c l
To set up a maintenance BOM:
r a
O ly
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.

& On
2. Choose Launch.

Bill of Material. l
3. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select the Activity for which you wish to define the

a e
4. Choose BOM.
r n s
n t e
5. Select an Activity from the Item field list of values.
U
6. Select the Main tab. The Item Sequence defaults.
I
7. Enter the Operation Sequence that this Component (material item necessary for the

e
c l
operation sequence, NOT rebuildable item) needs.
8. Enter necessary Components and their Quantities required to perform the Activity. You

r a can enter an unlimited number of inventory and non-inventory, direct items.

O The Purchasing tab is enabled for Maintenance and Asset Bills of Material, and contains
attributes specific to non-stockable, inventory items.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 170
This is referring to the material items necessary for the Activity.
9. Select the Auto Request Material check box to indicate that Requisition/Purchase Orders
are created automatically, for the current component or Direct Item, when the Work
Order is released.
10. Select the Date Effectivity tab to specify effectivity dates per component.
11. Save your work.
To associate Asset Numbers (capital or rebuildable inventory) with Activities using the
Activity Workbench:
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.
2. Select Asset or Rebuildable from the Item Type list of values. The item type determines
the type of Asset Number you are associating with the Activity.
3. Optionally narrow your data selection by selecting the Asset Number you intend to
associate with an Activity.
4. Optionally narrow your data selection by selecting and Activity.
5. Choose Launch.
6. Depending on the Item Type chosen while performing step 2, select the corresponding
tab within the Activity Workbench pane. For example, if you select an Item Type of
Asset, then select the Results (Assets) tab. If you select an Item Type of Rebuildable,
then select the Results (Rebuildables) tab.
7. Expand the All Assets (within the Results (Assets) tab) or All Rebuildables (within the
Results (Rebuildables) tab) folder. If you specified an Asset Number while performing
m y
step 3, then that Asset Number displays.
8. Select an Asset Number by highlighting it. The Activity Associations window displays. If
d e
the Asset Number is already associated with one or more Activities, then those rows
display within the window.
ca
9. Select the next available row and then select an Asset Group.

e A
c l
10. Select an Asset Number. Asset Numbers associated with the previously selected Asset
Group are available. Asset Numbers are always serial-controlled. If you select a Non-

required.
r a
serialized Rebuildable in the Asset Group field, then the Asset Number field is not

11. Select an Activity.


O ly
12. Save your work.

l & On
a e
To create an Activity Association Template:

r n
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.

s
2. Choose Launch.

t e U
3. Select the Results (Activities) tab.
n
e I
4. Expand the All Activities folder to display all valid Activities, based on your chosen
selection criteria, within the Activity Workbench window. You can select an Activity and

c l
view its related Activity information within the corresponding Activity Associations

r a window, if an association exists. You can associate an Asset Number with the current,
selected Activity using the corresponding Activity Associations window. You can select

O an Activity within the Activity Workbench pane, and then view its related information
within the corresponding Activity Associations window. For a selected Activity, you can
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 171
create a new Activity, create or update its associated Maintenance Routing, create or
update the associated Maintenance BOM, and view cost estimations.
5. Expand the Activities with Association folder to display all Activities that are associated
with an Asset Number, based on your chosen selection criteria, within the Activity
Workbench window. You can select an Activity within the Activity Workbench pane,
and then view its related information within the corresponding Activity Associations
window. For a selected Activity, you can create a new Activity, create or update its
associated Maintenance Routing, create or update the associated Maintenance BOM, and
view cost estimations.
6. Select Yes from the Template Flag list of values to indicate that this Activity and asset
association is also an Activity Association Template. If you select No, an asset and
Activity association is created.
7. Save your work.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Using the Activity
Workbench

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 172
Maintenance Routes

m y
d e
ca
e A
Maintenance Routes

c l
Operations are the instructions or tasks to perform a repair. Because each operation is

r a
associated with a department, each operation contains assigned resources, for example, trades
people, outside service providers, and equipment. A Maintenance Route is the set of operations
O ly
or jobs necessary to perform an Activity. When a Work Order is created for an Activity, the

l & On
Maintenance Route corresponding to the Activity explodes to the Work Order; all operations
specified in the Maintenance Route are copied to the Work Order as its operations.

a e
Maintenance Routes are not Asset Routes.
n
t e r U s
Enterprise Asset Management operations differ from manufacturing operations because
manufacturing operations are performed sequentially, whereas eAM operations are not

I n
performed sequentially. In Enterprise Asset Management, operations may not be sequential.
You can specify that one operation is dependent on another. Also, it is possible that two

c l e
unrelated operations can happen concurrently. One operation can depend on multiple
operations. Multiple operations can depend on one operation. The dependency may not be

r a
totally connected.
To define a maintenance route:

O 1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 173
2. Choose Launch.
3. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select the Activity for which you wish to create the
Routing.
4. Choose Routing.
5. Select an Activity from the Item list of values.
6. Within the Main tab, enter an operation Sequence, or let the system automatically
generate it for you, according to your profile setup.
7. To copy or reference standard operations into a routing, use the operation Code list of
values. You can define a new standard operation by selecting Standard Operations from
the Tools menu.
If you use a standard operation code, the operation information for that code is copied
into the current operation. You can then update that information as desired.
8. Select a Department where the operation is performed.
9. Select the Referenced check box to indicate that any changes to standard operations are
reflected in the routing. If the standard operation is selected, this check box is selected by
default.
10. The Effective date defaults to the system date, but you can optionally change this.
11. Enter a Disabled date to indicate the current operation's expiration.
12. Select the Description tab. Enter a Description for the current operation.
13. Choose Routing Network to view the operation dependencies for the current asset route.
You can schedule operations to run in parallel, sequence, or through dependent steps.
m y
14. Select an operation, then choose Operation Resources to view the resources associated
with the current department attached to this operation. Optionally, you can modify the
d e
resources listed.
ca
15. Save your work.

e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management > A
Workbench > Defining Asset Routes
c l
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Using the Activity

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 174
Practice - Defining Component Items
Overview
You can select the required items that make up an asset, or that are used by an Activity. You can
use a Bill of Material (BOM) to list all items and components that make up a particular asset;
you can define them for each Asset Group. The items defined on an Asset BOM are standard
inventory items and are not maintainable.

In this practice, you will define standard inventory items.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

You have completed all previous practices


m y
Tasks
d e
Define standard inventory items
ca
1.
e
Enter the following information, within the Master Item window: A
Item = XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
c
Description = XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
l
r a
Primary unit of measure = Quart

2. O ly
Apply the Purchased Item template.

3.
l & On
Select the Purchasing tab and enter the following information:
List Price = 2
n a e
4.
e r s
Assign the component to the EM1 organization.
t U
5.
I n
Apply Organization level attributes:
Receipt Routing = Direct

l e
Receiving Subinventory = XX eAM SUB
c
Planner = XX Planner

r a Make or Buy = Buy

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 175
6. Repeat steps 1 5, using the following information. Ensure that you enter all data, within
those steps.

Item Description Primary UOM List Price


(Main tab) (Main tab) (Main tab) (Purchasing tab)
XX AIR FILTER XX AIR FILTER Each 15.00
XX OIL FILTER XX OIL FILTER Each 25.00

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 176
Solution - Defining Component Items
Define standard inventory items

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Master Item window.

(N) Inventory > Items > Master Items

2. Enter the following information:


Item = XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
Description = XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
Primary unit of measure = Quart

3. (I) Save

4. Apply the Purchased Item template.

(M) Tools > Copy From

Select Purchased Item from the Template list of values.

m y
(B) Apply (B) Done

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 177
5. Select the Purchasing tab and enter the following information:
List Price = 2

m y
6. (I) Save
d e
7. Assign the component to the EM1 organization.
ca
Select the Organization Assignment icon.
e A

c l
Select the Assigned check box for the EM1 organization.

(I) Save
r a
O ly
8.
& On
Apply Organization level attributes.

l
(B) Org Attributes

n a e

t e r U
Receipt Routing = Directs
Select the Receiving tab and enter the following information:

n
Receiving Subinventory = XX eAM SUB
I
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 178
Select the General Planning tab and enter the following information:
Planner = XX Planner
Make or Buy = Buy

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n

c l e
(I) Save

r a Close the Organization Item window.


O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 179
9. On the Master Item window, select the Attribute Groups tab.

10. (M) Edit > Clear > Form

11. Repeat steps 2 9, using the following information. Ensure that you enter all data, within
those steps:

Item Description Primary UOM List Price


(Main tab) (Main tab) (Main tab) (Purchasing tab)
XX AIR FILTER XX AIR FILTER Each 15.00
XX OIL FILTER XX OIL FILTER Each 25.00

12. Close the windows.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 180
Practice - Purchase and Receive Component Items
Overview
You can select the required items that make up an asset, or that are used by an Activity. You can
use a Bill of Material (BOM) to list all items and components that make up a particular asset;
you can define them for each Asset Group. The items defined on an Asset BOM are standard
inventory items and are not maintainable.

In this practice, you will create a purchase order transaction and complete a receipt transaction to
receive the created component items.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations

m y
You have completed all previous practices

d e
Tasks
c a
Create a purchase order

e A
1.
l
Enter the following information, within the Purchase Orders window:
Supplier = Allied Manufacturing c
Site = SAN JOSE-ERS
r a
O ly
Ship-To = EM1 - Seattle Maintenance

Line 1
l & On
Field

n a e Value
Item
UOM
t e r U s
XX AIR FILTER
Each
Quantity
I n 3
Price

c l e
Promised Date
Defaults
Todays date

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 181
Line 2
Field Value
Item XX OIL FILTER
UOM Each
Quantity 3
Price Defaults
Promised Date Todays date

Line 3
Field Value
Item XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
UOM Gallon
Quantity 50
Price Defaults
Promised Date Todays date

2. Write down your Purchase Order number: ______________________

m y
e
3. Approve the Purchase Order.

Receiving component items


a d
4. Query your Purchase Order, using the Find Expected Receipts window.
A c
5.
l e
Within the Receipts window, ensure that all lines have XX eAM SUB populated within their
corresponding Subinventory fields.
c
6.
r a
Select all three lines and receive them.

O ly
Verify that your items are costed for Material

7.
l & On
Query your items, within the Find Item/Cost Type window.

n a e
8.

t e r
Repeat for the two additional items, from your purchase order.

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 182
Solution Purchase and Receive Component Items
Create a purchase order

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Purchase Orders window.

(N) Purchasing > Purchase Orders > Purchase Orders

2. Enter the following information:


Supplier = Allied Manufacturing
Site = SAN JOSE-ERS
Ship-To = EM1 - Seattle Maintenance

Line 1
Field Value
Item XX AIR FILTER
UOM Each
Quantity
Price
3
Defaults
m y
Promised Date Todays date

d e
Line 2
c a
Item
Field

e XX OIL FILTER A
Value

UOM
c l Each
Quantity
r a 3
Price
O ly Defaults
Promised Date

l & On Todays date

Line 3

n a e
Item
t e r
Field

U s XX ENGINE OIL 10/40


Value

UOM
I n Gallon
Quantity

c
Price l e 50
Defaults

O ra
Promised Date Todays date

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 183
3. (I) Save

4. Write down your Purchase Order number: ______________________

5. Approve the Purchase Order.

(B) Approve (B) OK

6. Close the window.

Receiving component items


m y
7. Navigate to the Find Expected Receipts window.
d e
(N) Purchasing > Receiving > Receipts
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 184
8. Enter the Purchase Order number, from the previous practice.

m y
d e
9. (B) Find

ca
A
10. Within the Receipts window, ensure that all lines have XX eAM SUB populated within their
corresponding Subinventory fields.

c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 185
11. Select all three lines.

12. (I) Save


m y
13. Close the window.
d e
Verify that your items are costed for Material
ca
14. Navigate to the Find Item/Cost Type window.

e A

c l
(N) Cost Definition > Item Costs > Item Costs

15. Query your items.


r a
O ly
Enter one of your items in the Item field.

(B) Find
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 186
Repeat for the two additional items, from your purchase order.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 187
Practice - Defining a Maintenance Route
Overview
Operations are the instructions or tasks to perform a repair. Because each operation is associated
with a department, each operation contains assigned resources, for example, trades people,
outside service providers, and equipment. A Maintenance Route is the set of operations or jobs
necessary to perform an Activity. When a Work Order is created for an Activity, the
Maintenance Route corresponding to the Activity explodes to the Work Order; all operations
specified in the Maintenance Route are copied to the Work Order as its operations.

Maintenance Routes are not Asset Routes.

Enterprise Asset Management operations differ from manufacturing operations because


manufacturing operations are performed sequentially, whereas eAM operations are not
performed sequentially. In Enterprise Asset Management, operations may not be sequential. You
can specify that one operation is dependent on another. Also, it is possible that two unrelated
operations can happen concurrently. One operation can depend on multiple operations. Multiple
operations can depend on one operation. The dependency may not be totally connected.

In this practice, you will define a maintenance routing, create operation dependencies, and assign
resources to operations.

m y
Assumptions
d e
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use
ca

e A
l
Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1


a c
Students replace XX with a unique identifier

r
O ly
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations


& On
You have completed all previous practices
l
Tasks
n a e
Create a maintenance route
t e r U s
1.
I n
Within the Routings window, query the Oil Change activity.

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 188
2. Enter the following information:

Sequence Department Description


10 XX MAINT Cool Engine
20 XX MAINT Drain Oil
30 XX MAINT Remove and replace Oil Filter
40 XX MAINT Replace Oil

3. Ensure that the Shutdown Type is Required for all Operation sequences.

Create operation dependencies for this maintenance route

4. Within the Maintenance Routing Network window, move each operation to the required
position. Operations 20, 30, and are dependent on Operation 10 completing.

5. Connect the operations in the sequence they are completed.

Define resources assigned to each operation

6. Select Sequence 10, within the Routings window.

m y
7. Enter the following information, within the Operation Resources window:
Sequence = 10
d e
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.5 c a
Schedule = Yes

e A
8.
c l
Select Sequence 20, within the Routings window.

9.
r a
Enter the following information, within the Operation Resources window:
Sequence = 10
Resource = XXOILER O ly
Usage Rate = 0.25
l & On
Schedule = Yes

n a e
t e r U s
10. Select Sequence 30, within the Routings window.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 189
11. Enter the following information, within the Operation Resources window:
Sequence = 10
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.05
Schedule = Yes

12. Select Sequence 40, within the Routings window.

13. Enter the following information, within the Operation Resources window:
Sequence = 10
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.05
Schedule = Yes

14. Select Sequence 50, within the Routings window.

15. Add two resources for this operation, within the Operation Resources window. On the first
line, enter the following information, within the Main tab:
Sequence = 10
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.1
Schedule Seq. = 1
Schedule = Yes
m y
16. On the second line, enter the following information, within the Main tab:
d e
Sequence = 20
Resource = XXLUBTRUCK ca
Usage Rate = 0.1
e A
Schedule Seq. = 1
Schedule = Yes
c l
r a
17. Select Sequence 60, within the Routings window.
O ly
Sequence = 10
l & On
18. Enter the following information, within the Operation Resources window:

Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.25
n a e
Schedule = Yes
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 190
Solution - Defining a Maintenance Route
Create a maintenance route

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Routings window.

(N) Activities > Maintenance Routings

2. Select the Oil Change activity from the Item list of values.

3. Within the Operations region, enter the following information:


Sequence Department Description
10 XX MAINT Cool Engine
20 XX MAINT Drain Oil
30 XX MAINT Remove and replace Oil Filter
40 XX MAINT Replace Oil

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 191
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O4. Select the WIP tab.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 192
5. Set the Shutdown Type to Required for all Operation sequences.

m y
6. (I) Save
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 193
Create operation dependencies for this maintenance route

7. (B) Routing Network. The Operations are on top of each other.

m y
d e
ca
8. (I) drag

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 194
9. Within the Maintenance Routing Network window, move each operation to the required
position. Operations 20, 30, and are dependent on Operation 10 completing.

m y
d e
10. (I) connect
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 195
11. Connect the operations in the sequence they are completed.

m y
d e
12. (B) OK

ca
Define resources assigned to each operation

e A
l
13. In the Routings window, select the Main tab.

c
14. Select Sequence 10.
r a
15. (B) Operation Resources
O ly
l
16. Enter the following information:
& On
Sequence = 10
Resource = XXOILER
n a e
Usage Rate = 0.5

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 196
17. Select the Scheduling tab, and set the following option:
Schedule = Yes

m y
18. (I) Save
d e
19. Close the Operation Resources window.
ca
20. Select the Main tab.
e A
21. Select Sequence 20.
c l
22. (B) Operation Resources
r a
O ly
23. Enter the following information, within the Main tab:
Sequence = 10
l & On
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.25
n a e
t e r U s
24. Select the Scheduling tab, and set the following option:

n
Schedule = Yes
I
l
25. (I) Save

c e
a
26. Close the Operation Resources window.

r
O27. Select the Main tab.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 197
28. Select Sequence 30.

29. (B) Operation Resources

30. Enter the following information, within the Main tab:


Sequence = 10
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.05

31. Select the Scheduling tab and set the following option:
Schedule = Yes

32. (I) Save

33. Close the Operation Resources window.

34. Select the Main tab.

41. Select the Main tab.

42. Select Sequence 40.

43. (B) Operation Resources

44. Add two resources for this operation. On the first line, enter the following information,
m y
within the Main tab:
Sequence = 10
d e
Resource = XXOILER
Usage Rate = 0.1 ca
e A
Schedule Seq. = 1
c l
45. Select the Scheduling tab, and enter the following information:

Schedule = Yes
r a
O ly
46. On the second line, enter the following information, within the Main tab:
Sequence = 20
Resource = XXLUBTRUCK
l & On
Usage Rate = 0.1

n a e
t
Schedule Seq. = 1
e r U s
47. Select the Scheduling tab, and enter the following information:

I n
Schedule = Yes

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 198
48. (I) Save.

49. Close the Operation Resources window.


m y
55. Close the windows.
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 199
Maintenance Bills of Material

m y
d e
ca
e A
Maintenance Bills of Material

c l
You can identify and select the required items used by an Activity. A bill of material (BOM) is

r a
used to list all inventoried or Direct Items needed to perform a particular Activity, and is
defined for each Activity. For example, you might have an Activity titled, Fork Lift Daily
O ly
Maintenance. The items necessary to perform this Activity include water, fork lift lubrication

to an Activity.
l & On
oil, filled propane tanks, and shop rags. As Maintenance BOMs are created, they are associated

a e
When a Work Order is created for an Activity, the Maintenance BOM corresponding to the
n
t e r s
Activity explodes to the Work Order; all components specified in the Maintenance BOM are
copied to the Work Order as material requirements.
U
I n
To set up a maintenance BOM:
1. Navigate to the Activity Workbench window.

l e
2. Choose Launch.

c
3. Within the Activity Workbench pane, select the Activity for which you wish to define the

r a Bill of Material.

O 4. Choose BOM.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 200
5. Select an Activity from the Item field list of values.
6. Select the Main tab. The Item Sequence defaults.
7. Enter the Operation Sequence that this Component (material item necessary for the
operation sequence not rebuildable item) needs.
8. Enter necessary Components and their Quantities to perform the Activity. You can enter
an unlimited number of inventory and non-inventory, direct items.
The Purchasing tab is enabled for Maintenance and Asset Bills of Material, and contains
attributes specific to non-stockable, inventory items.
This is referring to the material items necessary for the Activity.
9. Select the Auto Request Material check box to indicate that Requisition or Purchase
Orders are created automatically, for the current component or Direct Item, when the
Work Order is released.
10. Select the Date Effectivity tab to specify effectivity dates per component.
11. Save your work.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management Administration > Setting Up > Using the Activity
Workbench > Setting Up Maintenance Bills of Material

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 201
Practice - Defining a Maintenance BOM
Overview
You can identify and select the required items used by an Activity. A bill of material (BOM) is
used to list all inventoried or Direct Items needed to perform a particular Activity, and is defined
for each Activity. For example, you might have an Activity titled, Fork Lift Daily Maintenance.
The items necessary to perform this Activity include water, fork lift lubrication oil, filled
propane tanks, and shop rags. As Maintenance BOMs are created, they are associated with an
Activity. When a Work Order is created for an Activity, the Maintenance BOM corresponding to
the Activity explodes to the Work Order; all components specified in the Maintenance BOM are
copied to the Work Order as material requirements.

In this practice, you will define a Maintenance BOM.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use


Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

Students replace XX with a unique identifier


m y
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations
d e
You have completed all previous practices
c a
Tasks
e A
c l
a
Create a maintenance BOM (XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT)

r
1.
O ly
Within the Bills of Material window, query the XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT activity.

2.
& On
Enter the following information:

l
n a e
Item
Sequence Seq

t e r
Operation

U s Component Quantity Auto Request Material

10
20
40

I
50 n XX OIL FILTER
XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
1
424
Selected
Selected
30
c l e 60 XX AIR FILTER 1 Selected

r
3. a View the bills details.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 202
Solution - Defining a Maintenance BOM
Create a maintenance BOM (XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT)

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Bills of Material window.

(N) Activities > Maintenance BOM

2. Select the XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT activity from the Item list of values.

3. Select the Main tab.

4. Enter the following information:

Item Operation Component Quantity Auto Request Material


Sequence Seq
10 40 XX OIL FILTER 1 Selected
20
30
50
60
XX ENGINE OIL 10/40
XX AIR FILTER
424
1
Selected
Selected
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O5. (I) Save

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 203
6. View the details

(B) Bill Details

m y
7. Close the windows.

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 204
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 205
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Setting Up Oracle Enterprise Asset Management


Chapter 2 - Page 206
eAM Collection Plans

y
Chapter 3

em
a d
A c
c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 2
eAM Collection Plans

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 4
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 5
Overview of eAM Quality

m y
d e
ca
e A
eAM Quality

c l
A maintenance Work Order transitions through various steps in its lifecycle. One of the steps

r a
in the lifecycle is Completion. Certain quality plans might apply to the transaction, depending
on the quality plan's setup and its association to transactions and triggers. A list of quality
O ly
collection plans that applies to the completion transaction appears during the completion

l & On
process. If a quality plan is specified as mandatory, results are entered before the transaction
can finish. Otherwise, results entry is optional or can defer.

a e
While creating a collection plan, you have the option of adding collection triggers to the plan.
n
r s
Triggers are restrictions that you define for a collection plan. For example, Work Orders for

e
assets that belong to the TRUCK Asset Group require quality results entry for the collection
t U
plan. Data collection is initiated if all collection trigger conditions are satisfied.

I n
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

c l e
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Quality Setup

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 6
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 7
Collection Elements

m y
d e
ca
e A
Collection Elements

c l
Collection elements are the basic building blocks of collection plans, the data structures that

r a
you use to collect Quality results. Before you can collect quality data with Quality, you must
first create a collection plan. You begin by creating collection elements, which define the
O ly
characteristics of the product or process that you want to monitor, record, and analyze.

l & On
When you define collection elements, you are creating data fields that you can use in collection
plans to collect quality results. After you create a collection element, it is available as a
a e
selection on a list of values that you can choose from when you set up collection plans. You
n
r s
can create an unlimited number of user-defined collection elements, or you can use any of

e
Quality's predefined collection elements in your collection plans; for example, Asset, Asset
t U
Group, Activity, and Work Order. You can also create collection elements by copying them

I n
from one collection plan into another.

c l e
To define collection elements:
1. Navigate to the Collection Elements window using Quality > Setup > Collection

r a Element.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 8
The steps listed below describe how to define Collection Elements one-at-a-time in the
Collection Elements window. You can also define several collection elements
simultaneously using the Collection Elements Summary window.
The following Collection Elements are included with Oracle Enterprise Asset
Management; you do not need to define them: Asset Group, Asset Number, Activity,
Maintenance Work Order, Maintenance Operation Sequence.
2. Select the Collection Element name.
The collection element can contain alphanumeric characters, spaces, underscores, and
single quotation marks. You cannot use words that are reserved for column names, such
as NAME, OCCURRENCE, and ORGANIZATION_ID.
3. Select the Enabled check box to enable the collection element. You can add enabled
collection elements to collection plans.
4. Select its collection Element Type.
5. Within the Label region, enter text for the data entry Prompt. The prompt is the label for
the collection element field displayed in the Results region of the Enter Quality Results
window. Prompts also become the column headings on reports and online inquiries. The
default prompt is the name of the collection element, but you can overwrite it.
6. Within the Label region, enter a Hint. Hints are additional text that appears in the
message line, as you enter quality results, to guide you during data entry.
7. Within the Data region, select the collection element's Data Type. You can select any
data type, but you cannot change it after you define the collection element. The available
data types are Character, Number, Date, Comment, and Sequence.
m y
8. Within the Data region, select the Mandatory check box to indicate that a value must
always be entered for this collection element, when entering quality results. A mandatory
d e
collection element can be redefined as non-mandatory when added to a collection plan.
ca
9. Within the Data region, enter the Reporting Length to specify how much space is
A
allocated for this collection element's quality results values on reports, inquiries, and in
e
c l
the Enter Quality Results window. The reporting length does not determine the amount of
space used to store quality results values in the quality data repository. Results values can

r
be up to 150 characters in length.
a
O ly
10. If the Data Type is Number, then enter the Decimal Precision. If you define specification
limits for this collection element, then entering the decimal precision (refers to the

l & On
number of places after the decimal point) here controls the decimal precision of the
specification limit values that you can define.

n a e
11. Within the Data region, select a UOM. Units of measure can be entered for any collection

t e r U s
element, regardless of data type.
12. Within the Data region, enter a Default Value for the collection element. When you set a

I n
default value for the collection element (generally, the most commonly used value for the
collection element), it is automatically entered when you enter quality results. You can

l e
change this value.

c
13. Within the Data region, enter the SQL Validation Statement. This statement is used for

r a validation when you enter quality data. You can base a collection element's data
validation on any table in the Oracle database. To do this, you can define a SQL
O validation statement that Quality uses for validation when you collect quality data. This

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 9
SQL statement must be a SELECT statement in which you select two columns. For
example, if you have entered machine numbers in the database table, you can cross-
validate machine numbers entered as you collect quality results against the numbers.
For example, to validate machine numbers from a table called 'machine_numbers' stored
in the database, enter the following SQL validation statement:
SELECT machine_number, machine_description
FROM machine_numbers
WHERE NVL(disable_date, SYSDATE+1) > SYSDATE
AND organization_id=:parameter.org_id
ORDER BY custom_machine_number
To constrain the SQL Statement to the current organization, you can use the variable,
':parameter.org_id' for the current organization id. To constrain the SQL Statement to the
current user's id, you can use the variable, ':parameter.user_id' for the current user's id.
If you define both a SQL validation statement and a list of collection element values, then
the list of values is used for validation; the SQL validation statement is ignored.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Quality Setup

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 10
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 11
Quality Collection Plans

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating Quality Collection Plans

c l
You create collection plans to identify the data that you want to collect, and what actions you

r a
want to take based on the quality results that you collect. You can use collection plans to model
your test or inspection plans, and you can create an unlimited number of plans to support your
O ly
enterprise-wide quality data collection and analysis needs. Collection plans are invoked

l & On
manually for direct results entry, or automatically as you complete a Work Order.
To collect quality data, you must set up a data collection structure called a collection plan.
a e
Collection plans are composed of collection elements, their values and specifications, and any
n
r s
actions that you want to initiate in response to quality results. There are some considerations

e
that you must make before you set up collection plans. You must first create collection element
t U
types, then the individual collection elements that comprise the plan.

I n
For each collection element, you specify that Quality initiates an action based on the quality

c l e
data that you collect. The condition that you specify and the resulting action comprise an
Action Rule. Action Rules are evaluated and executed during the quality data collection

r a
process. For example, eAM lets you specify that a Work Request or a Work Order is created
automatically, based on certain conditions of the asset, determined by the quality data

O collected. The Action Rule is defined within the collection plan definition.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 12
To review a collection plan:
1. Navigate to the Collection Plans window using Quality > Setup > Collection Plans.
To assist you as you create collection plans, you can select the Summary and Detail
option from the View menu, and run a query to view existing collection plans in
summary format.
2. Select a valid Collection Plan.
3. Choose Transactions. You can create collection plans that are specifically used to collect
quality data during transactions performed in other applications.
4. Select EAM Work Order Completion or Asset Query from the Transaction Description
list of values.
EAM Asset Query: enables quality results collection for an asset, independent from any
transaction on the asset.
EAM Operation Completions: enables quality results collection for a Work Order's
operation pertaining to operation completion or during operation completion.
EAM Work Order Completions: enables quality results collection for a Work Order
pertaining to Work Order completion or during Work Order completion.
5. Indicate whether the collection plan requires the entry of quality results at Work Order
completion. If you select the Mandatory check box, then save at least one quality data
record before saving the Work Order completion transaction.
eAM supports Quality collection during operation completion transactions, as well as
Standalone Asset Query. Valid Transaction Description values are EAM Operation
Completions and EAM Asset Query, respectively.
m y
6. Select the Background check box. If you select this check box, then you can collect
d e
quality results for context reference elements.
The following Collection Elements are included with Oracle Enterprise Asset
ca
Management; you do not need to define them: Asset Group, Asset Number, Activity,

e
Maintenance Work Order, Maintenance Operation Sequence. A
c l
Without invoking the Enter Quality Results window, background data collection is

r a
initiated when you save the Work Order completion transaction. The system then finds,
selects, and initiates the appropriate collection plans.

O ly
If collection triggers are defined for background data collection, then data collection is

l & On
initiated if all collection trigger conditions are satisfied (you define triggers for
transactional data collection in the Collection Transactions window).

a e
Several collection plans can collect data in the background during the same transaction.

n
t e r
When this is the case, the results for context elements on all of these collection plans are
s
automatically saved when the parent transaction is saved.

U
n
7. Select the Enabled check box.

I
8. Optionally select a Trigger Name. Valid trigger values are Activity, Asset Group, Asset

e
l
Number, and Maintenance Work Order. Triggers are restrictions that you define for the

a c
collection plan.
If a trigger is not defined, then every Work Order requires quality collection results; the

O r collection plan is applicable to all assets.


9. If you select a Trigger Name, select a Condition.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 13
10. Select a From value. For example, if you selected Asset Group as the Trigger Name,
Asset Groups are available. Optionally, you can enter a To value to create a range
condition. For example, if the trigger is Work Order, you might enter a range of Work
Order numbers.
11. Save your work.
Creating eAM Quality Collection Plans for a Supplier
eAM lets you create Quality collection plans for a supplier to enter crucial Quality data using
the iSupplier Portal, before the supplier can complete an Outside Service Processing operation.
To create a eAM quality collection plan for a supplier:
1. Navigate to the Collection Plans window using Quality > Setup > Collection Plans.
To assist you as you create collection plans, you can select the Summary/Detail option
from the View Menu, and run a query to view existing collection plans in summary
format.
2. Select a valid Collection Plan.
3. Choose Transactions. You can create collection plans that are specifically used to collect
quality data during transactions performed in other applications.
4. Select EAM Operation Completions from the Transaction Description list of values.
5. Select the Mandatory check box to indicate that this collection plan requires the entry of
quality results at Operation completion. If this check box is selected, the supplier must
enter quality data before completing the Outside Services operation.
6. Save your work.
m y
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Quality Setup
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 14
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 15
Collection Plan Attachments

m y
d e
ca
e A
Collection Plan Attachments

c l
You can attach illustrative or explanatory files in the form of text, images, word processing

r a
documents, spreadsheets, video, graphics, OLE objects, and so on, to collection plans and
specifications. You can also attach files to quality results, as you enter them.
O ly
You can view collection plan attachments as you enter, view, and update quality results. You

l & On
can view specification attachments as you enter quality results. You can view quality results
line attachments as you update and view quality results.

n a e
To add collection plan attachments:

t e r U s
1. Navigate to the Collection Plans or Specifications window.
You must save the collection plan or specification before you can add an attachment to it.

I n
2. Choose the Attachments icon or choose attachments from the View menu. The
Attachments window appears.

c l e
To add attachments to quality results lines:

r a
1. Navigate to the Enter Quality Results window.
2. Select a quality results line.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 16
3. Choose the Attachments icon or choose attachments from the View menu. The
Attachments window displays.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Using eAM Quality

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 17
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 18
Triggering Work

m y
d e
ca
e A
Triggering a Work Request

c l
For each collection element, you can specify that Quality initiates an action based on the

r a
quality data that you collect. The condition that you specify and the resulting action comprise
an Action Rule. Action Rules are evaluated and executed during the quality data collection
O ly
process. For example, eAM lets you specify that a Work Request is created automatically

l & On
based on certain conditions of the asset determined by the quality data collected. The Action
Rule is defined within the collection plan definition.

a e
A Work Request is used to request work on an asset. A Work Request is not a Work Order, but
n
t e r
To set up work request triggers:
U s
is referenced by the Work Order that is ultimately created because of the Work Request.

I n
1. Navigate to the Collection Plans window.
2. Select a valid Collection Plan.

l e
3. In the Quality Collection Elements region, select the collection element to create an
c
action rule for. Choose Actions.

r a
4. In the Action Rules region, enter the Sequence number for the action rule.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 19
The sequence number establishes the order in which action rules are evaluated as data is
collected. The sequence number can be from 0 to 99999.
5. Select the Condition that must be met to invoke the action. For example, when the brake
pad thickness wears to less than .2, a Work Request is automatically created.
6. Choose either Value or Spec Limit to specify the evaluation method.
Value: If you choose Value as quality data is collected, then the action rule is evaluated
using the results value and the value entered. If you define a list of values for the
collection element, then choose a value from this list. If you have not defined a list of
values for the collection element, then enter any value.
Spec Limit: If you choose Spec Limit as quality data is collected, then the action rule is
evaluated using the quality results value and either the specification limit target value
(collection element level), the upper or lower user-defined range limits, or the upper or
lower specification range limits. Specification limits are defined at the collection element
level. Spec Limits can be used to define action rules that evaluate numeric results.
7. If the selected Condition requires a range of values, then enter both the From and To
value. If the selected Condition requires a single value, then enter the From value.
Some conditions (for example, is entered and is empty) do not require values.
If you have chosen the Values and a list of values is defined for the collection element,
then select values from this list. If you have not defined a list of collection element
values, then enter any value.
8. In the Actions this Rule Invokes region, select Create a work request.
9. In the Action Details region, enter a Message to Display or Log for this Action. If the
m y
selected action requires a status code, then enter the status code in the Action Details
region.
d e
10. Save your work.
ca
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Triggering a Work Request
e A
Triggering a Work Order
c l
r a
For each collection element, you can specify that Quality initiates an action based on the
quality data that you collect. The condition that you specify and the resulting action comprise

O ly
an Action Rule. Action Rules are evaluated and executed during the quality data collection
process. For example, eAM enables you to specify that a Work Order is created automatically,

l & On
based on certain conditions of the asset, determined by the quality data collected. The Action

n
To set up work request triggers: a e
Rule is defined within the collection plan definition.

e r s
1. Navigate to the Collection Plans window.

t U
n
2. Select a valid Collection Plan.

I
3. In the Quality Collection Elements region, select the collection element to create an

e
l
action rule for. Choose Actions.

a c
4. In the Action Rules region, enter the Sequence number for the action rule. The sequence
number establishes the order in which action rules are evaluated as data is collected. The

O r sequence number can be from 0 to 99999.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 20
5. Select the Condition that must be met to invoke the action. For example, when the brake
pad thickness wears to less than .2, a Work Request is automatically created.
6. Choose either Value or Spec Limit to specify the evaluation method.
Value: If you choose Value as quality data is collected, then the action rule is evaluated
using the results value and the value entered. If you have defined a list of values for the
collection element, then choose a value from this list. If you have not defined a list of
values for the collection element, then enter any value.
Spec Limit: If you choose Spec Limit as quality data is collected, then the action rule is
evaluated using the quality results value and either the specification limit target value
(collection element level), the upper or lower user-defined range limits, or the upper or
lower specification range limits. Specification limits are defined at the collection element
level. Spec Limits can be used to define action rules that evaluate numeric results.
7. If the selected Condition requires a range of values, enter both the From and To value. If
the selected Condition requires a single value, enter the From value.
Some conditions (for example, is entered and is empty) do not require values.
If you have chosen the Values and a list of values is defined for the collection element,
then select values from this list. If you have not defined a list of collection element
values, then enter any value.
8. In the Actions this Rule Invokes region, then select Create a Maintenance Work Order or
Create a Maintenance Work Order.
9. In the Action Details region, enter a Message to Display or Log for this Action. If the
selected action requires a status code, then enter the status code in the Action Details
m y
region.
10. Save your work.
d e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
ca
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Triggering a Work Order

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 21
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 22
Entering Quality Results

m y
d e
ca
e A
Entering Quality Results

c l
You enter Quality results when completing a Work Order, Operation, or Supplier Operation. If

r a
you selected the Mandatory check box when creating the collection plan , then the Quality
results entry is mandatory.
O ly
To enter quality results when completing a Work Order:

responsibility.
l & On
1. Navigate to the Work Order Completion window in the Maintenance Super User

2. Select the Work Order.


n a e
e r s
3. Save your work. If the collection plan that is triggered requires quality results entry, the

t U
Quality Results Entry window appears. If not, select Enter Quality Results from the Tools

I n
menu or select the Enter Quality Results icon. A collection plan is triggered if its
Transaction Description reads, EAM Work Order Completions (Oracle Enterprise Asset

l e
Management).

c
4. Enter the required information.

r a
5. Save your work.

O To enter quality results when completing an operation:

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 23
1. Navigate to the Work Order window.
2. Select a Work Order.
3. Choose Operations.
4. Complete an Operation.
5. Save your work. If the collection plan that is triggered requires quality results entry, the
Quality Results Entry window appears. If not, select Enter Quality Results from the Tools
menu or select the Enter Quality Results icon. A collection plan is triggered if its
Transaction Description reads, EAM Operation Completions (Oracle Enterprise Asset
Management).
6. Enter the required information.
7. Save your work.
To enter quality results using the iSupplier Portal:
eAM enables you to create Quality collection plans that are optionally mandatory for a supplier
to enter crucial Quality data, via iSupplier Portal, before the supplier can complete an Outside
Service operation. A supplier will complete an Outside Service operation when the outside
service is performed or shipped to the eAM organization.
1. Navigate to the iSupplier Portal.
2. Select the Orders tab.
3. Select Work Orders sub-tab.
4. Query a Work Order by PO, Work Order, From/To Need by Date, or From/To Promise
Date.
m y
5. Select a Work Order. The Work Order Detail page displays.
6. Choose Complete Operations.
d e
7. Enter necessary information and Quality Results.
ca
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

e
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Quality > Entering Quality Results A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 24
Practice - Setting Up Collection Plans
Overview
A maintenance Work Order goes through various steps in its life cycle. One of the steps in the
life cycle is Completion. When completing a maintenance Work Order, if the Asset Number has
associated, mandatory quality collection plans, you need to enter quality results for the Work
Order. A list of quality collection plans associated with the completion transaction appears
during the completion process. While creating a collection plan, you have the option of adding
collection triggers to the plan. Triggers are restrictions that you define for a collection plan. For
example, Work Orders for assets that belong to the TRUCK Asset Group require the entry of
quality results for the collection plan. Data collection is initiated if all collection trigger
conditions are satisfied.

In this practice, you will create a quality collection plan.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1

m y
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
d e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations
c a
You have completed all previous practices

e A
Tasks
c l
Set up a viscosity unit of measure
r a
1. O ly
Within the Unit of Measure Classes window, add a viscosity unit of measure:

l & On
Field
n a e Value
Name
Description
t e r U s XXVISCOSIT
SAYBOLT VISCOSITY
Base Unit
I n XX VISCOSITY

l e
Unit of Measure

c
XXV

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 25
Set up collection elements

2. Within the Collection Elements window, add a collection element:

Field Value
Collection Element XX VISCOSITY
Element Type Variable
Data Type Number
Reporting Length 8
Decimal Precision 2
UOM XXV

3. Add another collection element using the following information:

Field Value
Collection Element XX IRON CONTENT
Element Type Variable

m y
Data Type
Reporting Length
Number
8
d e
Decimal Precision 2
c a
UOM

e
G (Gram)
A
c l
Create a collection plan (Work Order Completion: Generating a Work Request)

4.
r a
Within the Collection Plans window, add a collection plan:

O ly
Field
l & On Value
Collection Plan

n a e XX WORK COMPLETION TRIBOLOGY


Description
Plan Type
t e r U s
XX WORK COMPLETION TRIBOLOGY
Maintenance Inspection

I n
c l e
Quality Collection Element
Name
Mandatory Enabled

O ra
Asset Group
Asset Number
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 26
XX IRON CONTENT Yes Yes
XX VISCOSITY Yes Yes

5. Within the Collection Transactions window, add a collection transaction for your newly
created collection plan:

Field Value
Transaction Description EAM Work Order Completions (Oracle
Enterprise Asset Management)
Mandatory Yes
Enabled Yes
Trigger Name Asset Group
Condition equals (=)
From XX EQUIPMENT

Create a quality action

6.

7.
Within the Collection Plans window, select the XX IRON CONTENT collection element.

Within the Quality Actions window, add collection actions:


m y
Action 1
d e
Field
c
Value
a
Condition
From
e
between
0.10 A
To
c l 0.15
Actions this Rule Invokes
r a Create a work request
Action Details
O ly THE IRON CONTENT IS BETWEEN 0.10
AND 0.15 REDO THE TESTING

l & On
Action 2
Field
n a e Value

e
Actions this Rule Invokes

t r U s Display a message to the operator


Action Details

I n The iron content is between .10 and .15 a work


request has been generated to redo the testing

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 27
Solution - Setting Up Collection Plans
Set up a viscosity unit of measure

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Unit of Measure Classes window.

(N) Inventory > Setup > Units of Measure > Classes (I) New

2. Add a viscosity unit of measure using the following information:

Field Value
Name XXVISCOSIT
Description SAYBOLT VISCOSITY
Base Unit XX VISCOSITY
Unit of Measure XXV

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
3. (I) Save
I n
4.
c l e
Close the window.

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 28
Set up collection elements

5. Navigate to the Collection Elements window.

(N) Quality > Setup > Collection Elements

6. Add a collection element using the following information:

Field Value
Collection Element XX VISCOSITY
Element Type Variable
Data Type Number
Reporting Length 8
Decimal Precision 2
UOM XXV

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
7. (I) Save (I) New
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 29
8. Add a collection element using the following information:

Field Value
Collection Element XX IRON CONTENT
Element Type Variable
Data Type Number
Reporting Length 8
Decimal Precision 2
UOM G (Gram)

9. (I) Save

10. Close the window.

Create a collection plan (Work Order Completion: Generating a Work Request)

11. Navigate to the Collection Plans window.

(N) Quality > Setup > Collection Plans

m y
12. Add a collection plan using the following information:

d e
Field
c
Value a
Collection Plan

e
XX WORK COMPLETION TRIBOLOGY A
Description
c l XX WORK COMPLETION TRIBOLOGY
Plan Type
r a Maintenance Inspection

O ly
Quality Collection Element
Name
l & On Mandatory Enabled

Asset Group
n a e Yes Yes
Asset Serial Number
XX IRON CONTENT
t e r U s Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XX VISCOSITY
I n Yes Yes

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 30
13. (B) Transactions

14. Add a collection transaction for your newly created collection plan, using the following
m y
information:

d e
Field
c
Value a
Transaction Description

e A
EAM Work Order Completions (Oracle

Mandatory
c l Enterprise Asset Management)
Yes
Enabled
r a Yes
Trigger Name
O ly Asset Group
Condition

l & On equals (=)


From

n a e XX EQUIPMENT

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 31
15. (I) Save

16. Close the Collection Transactions window.

m y
Create a quality action

d e
17. Within the Collection Plans window, select the XX IRON CONTENT collection element.

c a
A
18. (B) Actions

l e
19. Add collection actions using the following information:

c
Action 1
Field
r a Value
Condition
O ly between
From
l & On 0.10
To

n a e 0.15
Actions this Rule Invokes
Action Details
t e r U s Create a work request
THE IRON CONTENT IS BETWEEN 0.10

I n AND 0.15 REDO THE TESTING

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 32
Action 2
Field
Actions this Rule Invokes
Value
Display a message to the operator
m y
Action Details
d e
The iron content is between .10 and .15 a work

a
request has been generated to redo the testing

c
20. (I) Save.

e A
21. Close the windows.

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 33
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 34
Summary

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 35
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Collection Plans


Chapter 3 - Page 36
eAM Work Management

y
Chapter 4

em
a d
A c
c l e
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 1
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 2
eAM Work Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 3
Objectives

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 4
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 5
Overview of eAM Work Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of eAM Work Management

c l
The Work Order is the foundation of all maintenance organizations. Work orders define what

r a
resources and items are needed to conduct work. They can automatically generate through the
use of Preventive Maintenance Schedules, the issue of an inventoried rebuildable, breach of
O ly
quality results, or manually generated as a routine Work Order. These Work Orders are then

l & On
reviewed and shared with Operations to produce an estimated schedule.
Enterprise Asset Management integrates with Oracle Quality. Use Quality Collection Plans to
a e
predefine required feedback information that must be entered into Enterprise Asset
n
r s
Management, upon a Work Order's completion. For example, data to collect may include

e
inspection points for an Asset Number and Downtime variables. If a variance is recorded into
t U
the quality plan, a Work Request or Work Order is created. You can define quality collection

I n
plans directly on the Work Order, or define them as attributes of an Activity to ultimately

l e
default into future Work Orders generated for specific Asset Number and Activity
combinations.
c
r a
For each Work Order, the estimated costs aggregate from the associated BOM and resources to
develop a costing profile for the current Work Order. You can use Costing Profiles for future

O Budgeting and Forecasting.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 6
For each Work Order, the actual costs aggregate during the Work Order's lifecycle. These costs
roll up, based on the hierarchy of the current Work Order's associated Asset Number. View
these actual costs by period, at a transaction level, or at a summary level. Costs can roll up,
based on the hierarchy of Work Orders. You can view the costs (both actual and estimates) by
period, at a transaction or summary level.
Time and Labor Tracking
A maintenance Work Order tracks its associated resource usage of employees and equipment.
It is important to capture both estimated and actual time spent on each operation of a work
order. A resource that is identified for a Work Order is assigned a shift. In many cases, the
extent of the workload is unknown until the work starts. You can determine the actual usage
time of employees, equipment, and miscellaneous materials for specific operations in a Work
Order through Resource Charging.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management >
Overview of eAM Work Management

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 7
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 8
Work Requests

m y
d e
ca
e A
eAM Work Requests

c l
Operations and maintenance staff enter Work Requests to report problems and request non-

r a
emergency work on capital assets or rebuildable inventory. For example, an employee can
enter a Work Request to change the temperature in his office or to repair a broken chair. A
O ly
Work Request is referred to in the final Work Order, for its information. Following are some

are nonchargeable
l & On
Work Request properties. Work Requests:

n a e
must be approved, before associating them with a work order

t e r U
can be reviewed and updated s
can be created for any asset in your facility

I n
A Work Request serves a different function than a Work Order; it is a request for maintenance
on an asset (Capital or Rebuildable Inventory). eAM enables operations and maintenance staff

l e
to report any problems with an asset. A supervisor can approve, request additional information,
c
or reject a Work Request. A Work Request requires approval before it is generated into a Work

r a
Order. The Work Requests tab, within Maintenance Super User and or Self-Service Work

O
Requests User, lets you query existing and create new Work Requests for an asset.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 9
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management > Self
Service Work Requests User > Self Service Work Requests >
Overview of Work Requests

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 10
Life Cycle of a Work Request

m y
d e
ca
e A
Work Request Lifecycle

c l
A Work Request transitions through several statuses during its lifecycle.

r a
Open - A Work Request is created in an Open status.

O ly
Awaiting Work Order - The Work Request status changes from Open to Awaiting Work
Order if the individual on the approval route has approved it. If the Auto-Approve Work

Awaiting Work Order.


l & On
Request functionality is enabled for the current organization, the status is automatically

n a e
On Work Order - After a Work Request is associated with a Work Order, the status

t e r
changes to On Work Order.

U s
Rejected - The individual on the approval route rejected the Work Request.

I n
Additional Information - If the Work Request's status is Additional Information, the
originator needs to add the requested information.

c l e
Complete - The Work Request status transitions to Complete when the Work Order

r a associated with the request is completed.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 11
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management > Self
Service Work Requests User > Self Service Work Requests >
Work Request Statuses

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 12
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 13
Overview of eAM Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
Overview of eAM Work Orders

c l
Enterprise Asset Management Work Orders are created against assets and rebuildable

r a
inventory items. They are defined manually, or generated automatically based on a scheduled
Activity. If you attach an Activity to a manually created Work Order (normally the role of a
O ly
Planner), then the Work Order inherits the Activity's attributes, such as the maintenance BOM,

l & On
maintenance route (operations), attachments, quality plans, cost information, and scheduling
rules. When preplanned Work Orders are created for assets, the Activity information associated

a e
with the Work Order's current Asset Number automatically attaches material and resource

n
e r
requirement information to the Work Order.
s
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
t U
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 14
Work Order Status Lifecycle

m y
d e
ca
e A
Work Order Status Lifecycle

c l
An Enterprise Asset Management Work Order may progress through several statuses

r a
throughout its lifecycle duration. The diagram below illustrates how Enterprise Asset
Management Work Orders may start at a Draft status then move to Released, Complete, and
O ly
finally Closed. These statuses can vary depending on the type of Work Order created.

status.
l & On
Multiple Work Orders, associated with the same Activity combination, cannot be at a Released

n a e
Draft: Infinite resource capacity scheduling of Work Orders at a Draft status may take

t e r U s
place. You cannot charge labor or request material for Work Orders at this status.
Released: After a Work Order is Released, you can run the Work Order. You can charge

I n
labor, request material, and scheduling for this Work Order takes place to create the
scheduled start or end date. You can release a Work Order from the Work Orders

l e
window, and the Maintenance Workbench.

c
Unreleased: You can move an Enterprise Asset Management Work Order in Draft or

r a Released status to Unreleased. Scheduling can take place for these Work Orders but you
cannot charge labor or request material. An Unreleased Work Order cannot be changed to
O a Draft status.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 15
Pending Scheduling: If the Constraint Based Scheduler is enabled, the Work Order status
changes to Pending Scheduling, if a status of Released is chosen. After the Scheduler
process finishes running, the status changes back to Released. The Work Order is
scheduled, based on the constraint option chosen at the organization level.
Complete: A Complete status for an Enterprise Asset Management Work Order does not
require any completed operations. When a Work Order is completed, you can still charge
labor. You can uncomplete a Work Order; this transitions it to a Released status.
Uncompletion is performed within the work order complete/uncomplete pages in
Maintenance User or via the Work Order Completion window within the forms
application.
Complete - No Charges: A Complete - No Charges status for an Enterprise Asset
Management Work Order does not require any completed operations. You cannot charge
labor at this status.
Closed: You cannot charge any accounts after an Enterprise Asset Management Work
Order is closed. If a Work Order was at a Released status at the time of closing it, you
can unclose the Work Order to bring it back to a Released status. If a Work Order was at
a Complete status at the time of closing it, you can unclose the Work Order to bring it
back to a Complete status. For all other statuses during Work Order closing, unclosing
the Work Order transitions it to an Unreleased status.
On-Hold: Enterprise Asset Management Work Orders at Released and Unreleased
statuses can be put on hold. You cannot charge labor or request material for a Work
Order at this status.
Cancel: You can cancel an Enterprise Asset Management Work Order at any status in its
m y
lifecycle.
d e
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders
ca
> eAM Work Order Statuses

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 16
Release Approval Process

m y
d e
ca
e A
Release Approval Process

c l
A Work Order might require approvals or notifications at different stages of its lifecycle. For

r a
example, organizations typically want an approval process in place before a Work Order is
released. Workflow automates this process. You can initiate Workflow to generate
O ly
notifications, approvals, transactions, and update a Work Order status. You can enable

l & On
Workflow for Work Orders within the eAM Parameters. You can set up Business Events and
Event Subscriptions (or use seeded events and subscriptions) within Oracle Workflow to

a e
indicate what events trigger Workflow. Seeded events that trigger workflow are Work Order

n
e r
creation, Work Order release approval, Work Order completion, Work Order status change,
and Operation completion.

t U s
Optionally select the Approval History sub-tab to view the Work Order's approval history.

I n
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

c l
> Parameterse
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders

r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 17
eAM Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
Work Orders
There are four Work Order types:
c l
Routine
r a
Preventive Maintenance
Rebuild Work Orders O ly
l & On
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

a e
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 18
Routine Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
Routine Work Orders

c l
Routine Work Orders are normally created by a Planner from the Maintenance Workbench,

r a
and are also created using a menu option. Material and resource planning is used at each status
of the routine Work Order.
To manually create a Work Order: O ly
& On
1. Navigate to the Find Work Orders window.
l
n a e
2. Choose New. The header information displays general information about the Asset
Number and the type of work required.

e r s
3. The Work Order number is assigned, but you can update it.

t U
4. Enter an Asset Number requiring maintenance. The Asset Group defaults.

I n
5. Select an Asset Activity. Only Asset Activities associated with this Asset Number are

c l e
available.
If this Work Order was already created, then you can add an Asset Activity, as long as

r a the Work Order is in the Unreleased or Draft status, or an Asset Activity was not already
defined. If any tasks, material, or resource requirements exist, then these must be deleted

O before adding an Asset Activity to an existing Work Order.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 19
After selecting an Asset Activity, the associated maintenance BOM (material) and
maintenance route (resources), associated with the Activity, attach to the Work Order.
After an Asset Activity is saved to a Work Order, you can no longer change or delete it.
6. Enter a Class code to represent the charge (expense) accounts associated with the Asset
Number. This defaults from the Asset Number; you can update it.
7. Enter the Status. For example, Unreleased, Released, On Hold, and Draft. Certain
transactions update this status automatically, including Work Order Completion, for
example.
The Pending check box value determines whether the Work Order has reached the status
above or is still pending, due to workflow or other unfinished asynchronous activity. If
the check box is clear, the Status reflects the current state. If the check box is selected, the
Status reflects a desired target state that is not yet reached due to pending activity, such as
a workflow approval that is still in progress or another asynchronous process.
8. If this is a child Work Order in a Work Order network and Parent Child is populated in
the Relationship Type field, the Parent Work Order is populated in this field.
The Relationship Type field indicates the type of Relationship associated with the Work
Order. Valid relationships are Parent Child, End to Start Dependency, Cost, and Follow-
up Work. Manage complex maintenance jobs through these four types of Work Order
relationships.
Parent Child: This relationship enables a network of Work Orders, which includes one
top level Work Order that defines the time line of all its children Work Orders. The start
and end dates of the children Work Orders are within the start and end dates of the parent
m y
Work Order. A child Work Order can be parent to another Work Order. One parent can
have multiple children, but one child can have a single parent. There can be an infinite
d e
number of parent-child Work Order levels, within the Parent-Child relationship.
End to Start Dependency: You can create Work Orders with scheduling dependency
ca
relationships (including child sibling Work Orders). For example, one Work Order's

e
scheduled start date is dependent on another Work Order's completion. With this A
l
relationship, the next Work Order cannot start until the prior Work Order is completed.
c
r a
Cost: You can roll the child Work Order costs into the parent Work Order, for reporting
purposes. You can base the cost roll up, within a hierarchy, on scheduling relationships.

O ly
Scheduling relationships are not required to roll up costs within a hierarchy. You can
create a cost reporting hierarchy that is different from the scheduling hierarchy.

l & On
Follow-up Work: You can create a Work Order for the current capital Asset Number or

n a e
Rebuildable Item, while executing work for the asset on another Work Order. For
example, a second problem with the asset is discovered while executing a Work Order. A

t e r U s
Follow-up Work Order, associated with the original Work Order, is created for the issue.
This is independent of scheduling or cost relationships.

I n
9. The Instance Number field tracks the instances associated with the current Work Order.
This field is disabled.

l e
10. In the Scheduled Dates region, enter the Work Order's scheduled Start date if it is based
c
on a forward schedule. The scheduling process uses this date as a starting point to

r a calculate the scheduled end date and duration for allocated resources and material. If the

O material or resources are not available by this date, the scheduling process moves the start
date forward.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 20
Actual dates are entered at operation and Work Order completion. Scheduled dates are
calculated by the Enterprise Asset Management scheduler if you have Oracle
Manufacturing Scheduling enabled. Otherwise, the EAM scheduler calculates the dates.
11. Enter a scheduled Completion date for backward scheduling. This date indicates the
requested end by date for the work. The scheduling process uses this date as a starting
point to calculate the scheduled start date and duration for allocated resources and
material. If the material and resources are not available by that date, the scheduling
process moves the start date backwards to ensure completion by the required end date.
Actual dates are entered at operation and Work Order completion. If you have Oracle
Manufacturing Scheduling enabled, then scheduled dates are calculated by the Enterprise
Asset Management scheduler. Otherwise, the EAM scheduler calculates the dates.
12. Within the Main tab, the Owning Department defaults from the selected Asset Number.
This indicates the persons or department responsible for this Asset Number.
13. Select a Priority. For example, High, Medium, or Low.
14. Select a Work Order Type. Work Order Types enable you to differentiate Work Orders,
for example, Routine, Preventive, Rebuild, Emergency, or Facilities. Maintenance
management can use this information to sort and monitor work activities for reporting
and budgeting. Work Order Types are referenced in the Work Order.
15. The Shutdown Type defaults from the Activity. This helps the planner group Work
Orders that may require shutdowns, so that they are planned together.
16. If the Firm check box is selected, planning and scheduling does not adjust the schedule,
regardless of material or resource availability. This check box defaults as selected or
m y
cleared, depending on the Auto Firm On Release check box setting, established in the
Enterprise Asset Management Parameters setup for the current organization. This
d e
ca
defaults only after the Work Order is released. If the check box is selected, the end date is
calculated, based on the Work Order duration. The scheduler automatically calculates the

e
update this check box for Work Orders at Draft, Released, Unreleased, On-Hold, or A
duration based on the operations (resource duration setup) on the Work Order. You can

l
Cancel statuses. If the Firm check box is selected, you can still manually reschedule a
c
a
resource on the Work Order, thereby updating the dates on its corresponding Operation
and Work Order.
r
O ly
17. Select the Notification Required check box.

& On
18. Select the Tagout Required check box to indicate that the Area needs to be secured for

l
operations required to execute this Work Order. Tags are generally printed and placed on

a e
an asset, warning the plant that it is shutdown and should not be started. This check box

r n
helps the planner isolate those jobs that require a tagout.

s
e
19. To store tagout documents using the Attachments feature:

t U
Select the paperclip Attachments icon to attach relevant tagout documents. You can
n
e I
attach URL, file, or text attachments.
20. The Planned check box is selected if the current Work Order was created from forecasted

c l
Work Orders.

r a
21. Select the Enable Material Issue Requests check box to enable eAM to manage material
availability for the current Work Order. Material is physically available to a Work Order

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 21
via the material request and verification process. This check box is selected by default if
it is selected on the eAM Parameters window.
22. Enter the Failure Information. The Failure Information region appears if the Failure Code
Required value is set to Yes, within the Failure Set definition. If Failure Codes are
entered here and the Failure Entry Required check box is selected, Failure Code entry is
mandatory during Work Order completion.
23. The Material Shortage region lets you view material availability. This region populates,
after you have saved the Work Order. The Material Shortage field displays whether there
is a shortage of the material (at that moment in time) that is needed to complete the Work
Order's operations. This status helps you to determine when to start work. For example, if
there is a material shortage, you typically would not start work. The process that
populates this field considers both stocked and direct items. For stocked items, the Work
Order Material Shortage process determines whether all of the inventoried material
within the Work Order's associated BOM is available to transact (ATP is not considered).
For direct items, the Work Order Material Shortage process determines if all of the direct
items that are included within the Work Order's associated BOM are received into
Inventory. This process is normally set to automatically execute periodically, but you can
execute it from the menu at any time. You can choose Check Shortage to view the
shortage details.
24. Select the Activity tab to select alternate, predefined BOMs and Routings. After the
alternate BOM and Routing are selected, the system uses the associated items and assigns
the associated resources needed to execute the Work Order.
25. Select an Activity Type. This code indicates the type of maintenance for this Activity and
m y
is used when defining a job or a standard job, for example, Inspection, Overhaul,
Lubrication, Repair, Servicing, or Cleaning. This value defaults from the Activity.
d e
26. Select an Activity Cause to specify what situation caused this work to generate, for
ca
Activity.

e A
example, Breakdown, Vandalism, Normal Wear, or Settings. This value defaults from the

c l
27. Select an Activity Source to specify reasons Activities need execution, for example,
Warranty Compliance, OSHA Compliance, or Military Specification Requirements. This

r a
value defaults from the Activity.

O ly
28. Select the Project tab. This tab is enabled only if Project Manufacturing is installed and
enabled.
Select a Project.
l & On
Select a Task.

n a e
r
29. You can select the Rebuild tab if this Work Order is created for a rebuildable item.

t e U s
30. Select the Request tab to display Service and Work Requests associated with this Work
Order. You can add Service and or Work Requests to a Work Order by selecting a

I n
Service Request and or Request Number, respectively. Only Work Requests at an

e
Awaiting Work Order status and Maintenance Type Service Requests at an Open status

l
are available for association. You can associate multiple Work Requests to a single Work
c
Order, but only one Work Order can associate with a Service Request. You can associate

r a a Service Request to multiple Work Orders. You can dissociate a Work Request from a

O Work Order.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 22
31. Select the Approval History tab to view the Work Order's approval history. A Work
Order might require approvals or notifications at different stages of its lifecycle. For
example, organizations typically want an approval process in place before a Work Order
is released. Workflow automates this process. You can initiate Workflow to generate
notifications, approvals, transactions, and update a Work Order status. You can enable
Workflow for Work Orders within the eAM Parameters. You can set up Business Events
and Event Subscriptions (or use seeded events and subscriptions) within Oracle
Workflow to indicate what events trigger Workflow. Seeded events that you can enable
to trigger Workflow are: Work Order creation, Work Order release approval, Work Order
completion, Work Order status change, Operation completion.
32. Choose Operations to prepare necessary operations. These operations default from the
maintenance route associated with the current Activity, but you can update and add to
them.
33. Choose Materials to view or add items from the associated Asset Number's items list and
Defining Material Requirements, page 3-35). From the Material Requirements window,
you can optionally choose Select Materials to add materials from this Asset BOM to the
material requirements for the current Work Order.
34. Choose Resources to view, add, or update the resources assigned to each operation.
35. Choose Relationships to manage Work Order schedules and view Work Order details.
36. Choose Asset Route to view the Asset Route associated with the current Work Order's
Asset Group. You might need to perform one Activity on multiple Asset Numbers. To
eliminate the possibility of creating multiple Work Orders for the same Activity, you can
define Asset Routes.
m y
37. You can choose Asset Route if an Asset Route is associated with the current Asset
d e
Number.

ca
38. Choose Costs to view the costs of Work Orders falling in the specific accounting periods,
specified in the Accounting Information by Period region. Accounting Periods are
defined within Oracle General Ledger.
e A
c l
Select a Work Order, then choose Value Summary to view a summary of the actual,

current Work Order.


r a
estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment hours, and material against the

O ly
- Actual Costs: This is the accumulation of all costs for material and resource

& On
transactions for the Asset Number's associated maintenance Work Orders, based on

l
a specified period.

a e
- Estimates: A BOM (material parts list) and routing (resources) can associate with a

r n
Work Order. When you select the Estimates tab, the estimated costs of all material
s
e
and resources associated with a Work Order appear, enabling you to budget costs.

t U
- Variances: The difference between the actual costs recorded and estimated costs.
n
I
- Material: All material and material overhead transaction costs.

e
c l
- Labor: All employee resource and resource overhead transaction costs.
- Equipment: All material resource and resource overhead transaction costs.

r a
Choose Details to view actual, estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment
hours, and material for specific operations of the current Work Order.
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 23
39. Save your work. After saving a work order, you can optionally attach its associated
asset's attachments.
To dissociate a Work Request from a Work Order:
1. Highlight the Work Request.
2. Choose Delete.
3. Select the Bill, Routing tab to select alternate, predefined BOMs and Routings. After the
alternate BOM and Routing are selected, the system uses the associated items and assigns
the associated resources needed to execute the Work Order.
4. Choose Operations to prepare necessary operations. These operations default from the
maintenance route associated with the current Activity, but you can update and add to
them.
5. Choose Materials to view or add items from the associated Asset Number's items list.
From the Material Requirements window, you can optionally choose Select Materials to
add materials from this Asset BOM to the material requirements for the current Work
Order.
6. Choose Resources to view, add, or update the resources assigned to each operation.
7. Choose Relationships to manage Work Order schedules and view Work Order details.
8. Choose Asset Route to view the Asset Route associated with the current Work Order's
Asset Group. You might need to perform one Activity on multiple Asset Numbers. To
eliminate the possibility of creating multiple Work Orders for the same Activity, you can
define Asset Routes. You can choose Asset Route if an Asset Route is associated with the
current Asset Number.
m y
9. Choose Costs to view the costs of Work Orders falling in the specific accounting periods,
d e
specified in the Accounting Information by Period region. Accounting Periods are
defined within Oracle General Ledger.
ca
Select a Work Order, then choose Value Summary to view a summary of the actual,

e A
estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment hours, and material against the
current Work Order.
c l
r a
- Actual Costs: This is the accumulation of all costs for material and resource
transactions for the Asset Number's associated maintenance Work Orders, based on
a specified period.
O ly
- Estimates: A BOM (material parts list) and routing (resources) can associate with a

l & On
Work Order. When you select the Estimates tab, the estimated costs of all material

n a e
and resources associated with a Work Order appear, enabling you to budget costs.
- Variances: The difference between the actual costs recorded and estimated costs.

e r s
- Material: All material and material overhead transaction costs.

t U
n
- Labor: All employee resource and resource overhead transaction costs.

I
- Equipment: All material resource and resource overhead transaction costs.

e
c l
Choose Details to view actual, estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment
hours, and material for specific operations of the current Work Order.

r a
10. Optionally select a Work Order, then choose Value Summary to view a summary of the
actual, estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment hours, and material
O against the current Work Order.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 24
11. Save your work.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders
> Routine Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 25
Practice - Defining Meters
Overview
There are two ways to create meters. You can create them within the Meter Definition window,
or create them first using aMeter Template window, and then next instantiating them when
defining an asset. If you create Meters using the Meter Definition window, associate that meter
definition with individual Asset Numbers manually. If you utilize the Meter Template definition
functionality, you can associate that Meter Template with Asset Groups. After the association is
created, when an Asset Number (Asset Numbers or Rebuildable Serial Numbers) is created
within that Asset Group (Asset Group or Rebuildable Item), the system automatically creates a
new instance of the meter, associated with the specific Asset Number. This enables you to
streamline your meter setup. However, the meters are not created retroactively; it applies to
Asset Numbers created after the Meter Template was created.

In this practice, you will define a meter and then associate it with an Asset Number.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor


might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use the EAM organization


m y
Students replace XX with a unique identifier
d e
The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations
ca

e A
l
You have completed all previous practices

c
Tasks
r a
Define a meter
O ly
1.
& On
Enter the following information, within the Meter window:
l
Name = XX 994 FEL METER
a e
Description = XX 994 FEL METER
n
Type = Absolute
UOM = HR
t e r U s
I n
Value Change = Ascending
Used In Scheduling = Yes

l e
Rate(per day) = 20

c
Number of Past Readings = 100

r a Initial Reading = 0

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 26
Associate an asset with the meter

2. Enter the following information, within the Meter Association window:


Asset Type = Capital
Asset Number = XX-1000
Name = XX 994 FEL METER
Type = Absolute
UOM = HR (default)
Value Change = Ascending (default)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 27
Solution - Defining Meters
Define a meter

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Meter window.

(N) Meters > Meter Definition

2. Select the EM1 organization.

3. Enter the following information:


Name = XX 994 FEL METER
Description = XX 994 FEL METER
Type = Absolute
UOM = HR
Value Change = Ascending
Initial Reading = 0
Used In Scheduling = Yes
Rate (per day) = 20
Number of Past Readings = 100
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
4. (I) Save

t e r U s
5.
I n
Close the window.

l e
Associate an asset with the meter

c
6.
r a Navigate to the Meter Association window.

O (N) Meters > Meter Association

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 28
7. Enter the following information:
Asset Type = Capital
Asset Number = XX-1000

8. In the Meters region, enter the following information:


Name = XX 994 FEL METER
Type = Absolute
UOM = HR (default)
Value Change = Ascending (default)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
9. (I) Save

r a
10. Close the window.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 29
Practice - Entering Routine Work Orders
Overview
Routine Work Orders are normally created by a Planner from the Maintenance Workbench, and
are also created using a menu option. Material and resource planning is used at each status of the
routine Work Order.

In this practice, you will manually enter two routine work orders, using the menu option. You
will view the details of Work Order Operations, Resources, Materials, and Costs. The planner
may also enter a routine work order from the Maintenance Workbench; the Maintenance
Workbench will be covered later in this chapter.

Assumptions
Students log into Oracle with User Name mfg and Password welcome; your instructor
might have a different User Name and Password for you to use

Students use eAM enabled organization, EM1


Students replace XX with a unique identifier

The instructor has completed all guided demonstrations


m y
You have completed all previous practices
d e
Tasks
ca
Enter a routine work order for XX-1000
e A
c l
1.
a
Within the Work Orders window, enter the following information:
Work Order = XX WO 1000
r
O ly
Description = Manual Work Order
Asset Number = XX-1000

l & On
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT (default)
Asset Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT

n a e
Class = XX eAM ACC (default)
Status = Draft

t e r U s
Work Order Type = Routine

n
Scheduled Dates: Start = Current Date and Time
I
2.
l e
Within the Main tab, enter the following information:

c
Enable Material Issue Requests = Selected

r
3. a Select the Activity tab, and view the following defaulted information:

O Activity Type = Maintenance

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 30
Activity Cause = Preventive
Activity Source = Routine

4. View the Work Orders operations.

5. View the Work Orders resources.

6. Within the Resource Instances window, for Operation 10, enter your name in the Instance
Name field. Repeat this for all OILER operations.

7. Select Operation 50 (LUBTRUCK resource).

8. Enter the following information, within the Resource Instances window:


Instance Name = XX LUB TRUCK (if only one LUB TRUCK serial number is
defined, it is automatically selected)

9. Select the Quantities tab and view.

10. Select the Scheduling tab and view.

11. Select the Costing tab and view.

12. Close the Resources window.

13. Within the Work Orders window, view the Work Orders relationships.
m y
14. Within the Work Order Value Summary window, view the Work Orders cost information.
d e
15. View the Cost Details by Operation information.
ca
e
16. View the Estimated Cost Details for Operation Sequence Number 50. A
c l
17. Change the Status of the Work Order to Released.

r
Enter a routine work order for XX-1002 a
O ly
l
Work Order = XX WO 1002 & On
18. Within the Work Orders window, enter the following information:

n a e
Description = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
Asset Number = XX-1002

e r s
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT (default)
t U
Asset Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT

I n
Class = XX eAM ACC (default)
Status = Draft
l e
Work Order Type = Routine
c
Scheduled Dates: Start = Current Date and Time

r a
O19. Within the Main tab, enter the following information:
Firm = Selected
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 31
Tagout Required = Selected
Enable Material Issue Requests = Cleared

20. Select the Activity tab, and view the following defaulted information:
Activity Type = Maintenance
Activity Cause = Preventive
Activity Source = Routine

21. Within the Resource Instances window, create yourself as the OILER resource instance, for
operation 10.

22. Repeat step 21 for all OILER operations.

23. Within the Resource Instances window, create XX LUB TRUCK as the LUBTRUCK
resource instance, for operation 50.

24. Change the Work Orders Status to Released.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 32
Solution - Entering Routine Work Orders
Enter a routine work order for XX-1000

Responsibility = Enterprise Asset Management, Vision Operations

1. Navigate to the Work Orders window.

(N) Work Orders > Work Orders > (B) New

2. Enter the following information:


Work Order = XX WO 1000
Description = Manual Work Order
Asset Number = XX-1000
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT (default)
Asset Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
Class = XX eAM ACC (default)
Status = Draft (default)
Scheduled Dates: Start = Current Date and Time

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 33
3. Within the Main tab, enter the following information:
Enable Material Issue Requests = Selected
Work Order Type = Routine

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
4.
r a
Select the Activity tab, and view the following defaulted information:
Activity Type = Maintenance
O ly
Activity Cause = Preventive

& On
Activity Source = Routine
l
5. (I) Save
n a e
6.
e r s
Note the Completion Date: _________________________
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 34
9. View the Work Orders material list.

(B) Materials

Select the Main tab.

m y
d e
ca
e A

c l
r a
Select the Quantities tab and review the information.

O ly
Select the Supply tab and review the information.


& On
Close the Material Requirements window.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 35
10. View the Work Orders resources.

(B) Resources

m y
d e
ca
11. (B) Instances
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 36
12. For Operation 10, select your name in the Instance Name field.

m y
13. (I) Save

d e
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 for all OILER operations.

ca
15. Close the Resource Instances window.

e A
16. Select Operation 50 (LUBTRUCK resource).

c l
17. (B) Instances
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 37
18. Enter the following information:
Instance Name = XX LUB TRUCK (if only one LUB TRUCK serial number is
defined, it is automatically selected)

19. (I) Save

20. Close the Resource Instances window.

21. Select the Quantities tab and view.

22. Select the Scheduling tab and view.

23. Select the Costing tab and view.

24. Close the Resources window.

25. (B) Relationships

26. Close the page so that you are back within the Work Order window.

27. (B) Costs (B) Value Summary

28. Select the Estimates tab.

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O29. (B) Details

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 38
30. Select Estimates tab.

31. Use your down arrow key to select Operation Sequence Number 50.

32. (B) Detailed Estimates

m y
d e
ca
e A
Work Order window.
c l
33. Close the Estimated Cost Details and Maintenance Work Orders windows, to return to the

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 39
34. Change the Status to Released.

m y
d e
ca
e A
35. (I) Save

c l
36. Close the windows.
r a
O ly
Enter a routine work order for XX-1002

l & On
37. Navigate to the Work Orders window.


n a e
(N) Work Orders > Work Orders > (B) New

t e r U s
38. Enter the following information:

I n
Work Order = XX WO 1002
Description = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT

c l e
Asset Number = XX-1002
Asset Group = XX EQUIPMENT (default)

r a Asset Activity = XX SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT


Class = XX eAM ACC (default)
O Status = Draft

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 40
Work Order Type = Routine
Scheduled Dates: Start = Current Date and Time

39. Within the Main tab, enter the following information:


Firm = Selected
Tagout Required = Selected
Enable Material Issue Requests = Cleared

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
40. Select the Activity tab, and view the following defaulted information:
Activity Type = Maintenance
a e
Activity Cause = Preventive
n
t e r U s
Activity Source = Routine

41. (I) Save

I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 41
42. Create yourself as the OILER resource instance.

(B) Resources

Select Operation 10.

(B) Instances

Enter your name in the Instance Name field.

(I) Save

Close the Resource Instances window.

43. Repeat steps 42 for all OILER operations.

44. Within the Resources window, select Operation 50, sequence 20 (LUBTRUCK resource).

45. (B) Instances

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 42
46. Enter the following information:
Instance Name = XX LUB TRUCK (if only one LUB TRUCK serial number is
defined, it is automatically selected)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
47. (I) Save
r a
O ly
48. Close the Resource Instances and Resources windows.

l & On
49. Change the Status to Released.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 43
m y
d e
50. (I) Save
ca
51. Close the windows.
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 44
Preventive Maintenance Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
Preventive Maintenance Work Orders

c l
Enterprise Asset Management lets you generate Work Orders automatically based on meter

r a
readings, runtime intervals, and calendar days. Preventive maintenance Activities reduce the
probability of failure or degradation of the assets' physical conditions. These Activities are
O ly
executed periodically, by usage, or based on the condition of an Asset Number (asset or

l & On
rebuildable serial number). Meters are entered to measure any Asset Number that needs to be
measured and periodically serviced, based on the measurement. For example, a pipe may start

a e
out at 12 millimeters, but when it wears to only four millimeters, it needs to be replaced.

n
r s
Scheduling definitions are defined to create forecasted, scheduled Work Orders, based on

e
meter readings. You can create a Preventive Maintenance scheduling definition for an Asset
t U
Number and or Rebuildable Item and Activity combination, or an Asset Route. After you have

I n
defined Preventive Maintenance scheduling definitions, the Preventive Maintenance scheduler

e
process runs. You can view these forecasted Work Orders using the Maintenance Workbench.
l
You can run the Generate Preventive Maintenance Work Orders process. When this process
c
executes, the WIP Mass Load process executes in the background, creating forecasted Work

r a
Orders in an Unreleased status. You can choose the Implement button to change the status of

O the Unreleased Work Orders to Released Work Orders.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 45
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders
> Preventive Maintenance Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 46
Rebuild Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
Rebuild Work Orders

c l
Rebuild Work Orders are created as child Work Orders. For example, a Work Order was issued

r a
for the inspection of a pump. During the pump inspection, you found that the motor, one of the
components of the pump, is problematic. You have two options: You can repair and then re-
O ly
install this motor (Rebuildable Item), or you can replace the rebuildable item by issuing a new

l & On
motor Rebuildable Item from inventory. If perform a material issue from inventory, then the
old motor rebuildable item attaches to the Work Order, automatically creating the child, rebuild

a e
Work Order number associated to the parent Work Order. In this case, the Asset Number

n
e r
genealogy automatically updates to identify this new item number.
s
If you choose to repair and then re-install the problematic motor rebuildable item, then you can
t U
manually create the child rebuild Work Order for the old motor (rebuildable item).

I n
The instructions below provide you with the option to create a rebuild Work Order without

c l e
issuing new material. The Rebuildable Item is replaced back into the asset (motor placed back
into the pump, for example), and does not go to a subinventory when the Work Order is

r a
completed. In this case, the Asset Number genealogy is not updated.
To create rebuild Work Orders:

O 1. Navigate to the Find Rebuild Work Orders window.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 47
2. Choose New. The header information displays general information about the rebuildable
item and the type of work required.
3. A Work Order number is assigned, but you can update it.
4. Enter a Description for this Work Order, up to 240 characters.
5. Select an Asset Number (Serial Number) from the list of values
6. Enter a Rebuild Item requiring maintenance.
7. Select a Rebuild Activity. Only Activities associated with this Rebuildable Item are
available. If an Activity does not exist, you can add operations, and material/resource
requirements to this Work Order manually. If an Activity does exist, you can update the
material and resources by choosing the Materials or Resources buttons from this window
or by utilizing the Maintenance Workbench.
8. Enter a Class code. This represents the charge (expense) accounts associated with the
Asset Number. This defaults from the Asset Number and can be updated.
9. Enter the Status. For example, Unreleased, Released, On Hold, and Draft. Certain
transactions update this status automatically, including Work Order Completion, for
example.
10. If this is a child Work Order in a Work Order network and Parent Child is populated in
the Relationship Type field, the Parent Work Order is populated in this field.
11. The Relationship Type field indicates the type of Relationship associated with the Work
Order. Valid relationships are Parent Child, End to Start Dependency, Cost, and Follow-
up Work. Manage complex maintenance jobs through these four types of Work Order
relationships.
m y
Parent Child: This relationship enables a network of Work Orders, which includes one
d e
ca
top level Work Order that defines the time line of all its children Work Orders. The start
and end dates of the children Work Orders are within the start and end dates of the parent
Work Order. A child Work Order can be parent to another Work Order. One parent can
have multiple children, but one child can have a single parent.
e A
c l
End to Start Dependency: You can create Work Orders with scheduling dependency
relationships (including child sibling Work Orders). For example, one Work Order's

r a
scheduled start date is dependent on another Work Order's completion. With this

O ly
relationship, the next Work Order cannot be created until the prior Work Order, for the
current asset, is completed.

l & On
Cost: You can roll the child Work Order costs into the parent Work Order, for reporting
purposes. You can base the cost roll up, within a hierarchy, on scheduling relationships.

n a e
Scheduling relationships are not required to roll up costs within a hierarchy. You can

t e r U s
create a cost reporting hierarchy that is different from the scheduling hierarchy.
Follow-up Work: You can create a Work Order for the current capital Asset Number or

I n
Rebuildable Item, while executing work for the asset on another Work Order. For
example, a second problem with the asset is discovered while executing a Work Order. A

l e
Follow-up Work Order, associated with the original Work Order, is created for the issue.

c
This is independent of scheduling or cost relationships.

r a
12. In the Scheduled Dates region, enter the scheduled Start date of the Work Order if it is
based on a forward schedule. The scheduling process uses this date as a starting point to
O calculate the scheduled end date and duration for allocated resources and material. If the

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 48
material or resources are not available by this date, the scheduling process moves the start
date forward.
Actual dates are entered at operation and Work Order completion. Scheduled dates are
calculated by the Enterprise Asset Management scheduler if you have Oracle
Manufacturing Scheduling enabled. Otherwise, the EAM scheduler calculates the dates.
13. Enter a scheduled Completion date for backward scheduling. This indicates the requested
end by date of the work. The scheduling process uses this date as a starting point to
calculate the scheduled start date and duration for allocated resources and material. If the
material and resources are not available by that date, the scheduling process moves the
start date backwards to ensure completion by the required end date.
Actual dates are entered at operation and Work Order completion. Scheduled dates are
calculated by the Enterprise Asset Management scheduler if you have Oracle
Manufacturing Scheduling enabled. Otherwise, the EAM scheduler calculates the dates.
14. Within the Main tab, the Owning Department defaults from the selected Asset Number.
This indicates the persons or department responsible for this Asset Number.
15. Select a Priority. For example, High, Medium, or Low.
16. Select a Work Order Type. Work Order Types enable you to differentiate Work Orders,
for example, Routine, Preventive, Emergency, or Facilities. Maintenance management
can use this information to sort and monitor work activity for reporting and budgeting.
Work Order Types are referenced in the Work Order.
17. The Shutdown Type defaults from the Rebuild Activity. This helps the planner group
Work Orders that need shutdowns, so that they are planned together.
m y
18. If the Firm check box is selected, then planning and scheduling does not adjust the
schedule, regardless of material or resource availability. This check box defaults as
d e
selected or cleared, depending on the Auto Firm On Release check box setting,
established in the Enterprise Asset Management Parameters setup for the current
ca
e A
organization. This defaults only after the Work Order is released. If the check box is
selected, the end date is calculated, based on the Work Order duration. The scheduler

c l
automatically calculates the duration based on the operations (resource duration setup) on

r a
the Work Order. You can update this check box for Work Orders at Draft, Released,
Unreleased, On-Hold, or Cancel statuses.

O ly
19. Select the Notification Required check box.

l & On
20. Select the Tagout Required check box to indicate that the Area needs to be secured for
operations required to execute this Work Order. Tags are generally printed and placed on

a e
an asset, warning the plant that it is shutdown and should not be started. This check box

n
r
helps the planner isolate those jobs that require a tagout.

t e U s
To store tagout documents using the Attachments feature: Select the paperclip
Attachments icon to attach relevant tagout documents. You can attach URL, file, or text

I
attachments.
n
c l e
21. The Planned check box is selected if the current Work Order was created from forecasted
Work Orders.

r a
22. Select the Enable Material Issue Requests check box to let eAM manage material
availability for the current Work Order. Material is physically available to a Work Order

O via the material request and verification process.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 49
23. Enter Failure Information. The Failure Information region appears if the Failure Code
Required value is set to Yes within the Failure Set definition. If Failure Codes are entered
here and the Failure Entry Required check box is selected, Failure Code entry is
mandatory during Work Order completion.
24. The Material Shortage region lets you view material availability. This region populates,
after you have saved the Work Order. The Material Shortage field displays whether there
is a shortage of the material (at that moment in time) that is needed to complete the Work
Order's operations. This status helps you determine when to start work. For example, if
there is a material shortage, then you typically would not start work. The process that
populates this field considers both stocked and direct items. For stocked items, the Work
Order Material Shortage process determines whether all of the inventoried material
within the Work Order's associated BOM is available to transact (ATP is not considered).
For direct items, the Work Order Material Shortage process determines if all of the direct
items that are included within the Work Order's associated BOM are received into
Inventory. This process is normally set to automatically execute periodically, but you can
execute it from the menu at any time. You can choose Check Shortage to view the
shortage details.
25. Select the Activity tab to choose alternate, predefined BOMs and Routings. After the
alternate BOM and Routing are selected, the system uses the associated items and assigns
the associated resources needed to execute the Work Order.
Select an Activity Type. This code indicates the type of maintenance for this Activity and
is used when defining a job or a standard job, for example, Inspection, Overhaul,
Lubrication, Repair, Servicing, or Cleaning. This value defaults from the Activity.
m y
Select an Activity Cause to specify what situation caused this work to generate, for
example, Breakdown, Vandalism, Normal Wear, or Settings. This value defaults from the
d e
Activity.
ca
Select an Activity Source to specify reasons Activities need execution, for example,
Warranty Compliance, OSHA Compliance, or Military Specification Requirements. This

e A
value defaults from the Activity.

c l
26. Select the Project tab. This tab is enabled if Project Manufacturing is installed and
enabled.
r a
Select a Project.
Select a Task. O ly
l & On
27. Select the Rebuild tab, if the Work Order is created for a rebuildable item. This Work

n a e
Order is the parent to the current child Work Order. The Charge Asset field is populated
with the parent Work Order's associated asset.

e r s
28. Select the Request tab to display Service and Work Requests associated with this Work

t U
Order. You can add Service and or Work Requests to a Work Order by selecting a

I n
Service Request and or Request Number, respectively. Work Requests at an Awaiting
Work Order status and Maintenance Type Service Requests are available for association.

l e
You can associate multiple Work Requests to a single Work Order, but one Work Order

c
can associate with a Service Request. You can associate a Service Request to multiple

r a Work Orders. You can dissociate a Work Request from a Work Order.

O 29. Select the Approval History tab to view the Work Order's approval history. A Work
Order might require approvals or notifications at different stages of its lifecycle. For

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 50
example, organizations typically want an approval process in place before a Work Order
is released. Workflow automates this process. You can initiate Workflow to generate
notifications, approvals, transactions, and update a Work Order status. You can enable
Workflow for Work Orders within the eAM Parameters. You can set up Business Events
and Event Subscriptions (or use seeded events and subscriptions) within Oracle
Workflow to indicate what events trigger Workflow. Seeded events that you can enable
to trigger Workflow are: Work Order creation, Work Order release approval, Work Order
completion, Work Order status change, Operation completion.
30. Choose Operations to prepare necessary operations. These operations default from the
maintenance route associated with the current Activity, but you can add or update them.
31. Choose Materials to view, add, or update the associated Asset Number's items list. From
the Material Requirements window, you can optionally choose Select Materials to add
Materials from the Asset BOM to the material requirements for the current Work Order.
32. Choose Resources to view, add, or update the resources assigned to each operation.
33. Choose Relationships to manage Work Order schedules and view Work Order details.
This button is enabled if a Relationship Type was previously selected.
34. Choose Asset Route to view the Asset Route associated with the current Work Order's
Asset Group. You might need to perform one Activity on multiple Asset Numbers. To
eliminate the possibility of creating multiple Work Orders for the same Activity, you can
define Asset Routes. You can choose Asset Route if an Asset Route is associated with the
current Asset Number.
35. Choose Costs to view the costs of Work Orders falling in the specific accounting periods,
m y
specified in the Accounting Information by Period region. Accounting Periods are
defined within Oracle General Ledger.
d e
Select a Work Order, then choose Value Summary to view a summary of the actual,

ca
estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment hours, and material against the
current Work Order.

e
- Actual Costs: This is the accumulation of all costs for material and resource A
c l
transactions for the Asset Number's associated maintenance Work Orders, based on
a specified period.

r a
- Estimates: A BOM (material parts list) and routing (resources) can associate with a

O ly
Work Order. When you select the Estimates tab, the estimated costs of all material

& On
and resources associated with a Work Order appear, enabling you to budget costs.

l
- Variances: The difference between the actual costs recorded and estimated costs.

a e
- Material: All material and material overhead transaction costs.

r n s
- Labor: All employee resource and resource overhead transaction costs.

t e U
- Equipment: All material resource and resource overhead transaction costs. 36..

n
I
Choose Details to view actual, estimated, and variance costs for labor hours, equipment
hours, and material for specific operations of the current Work Order.

e
l
Save your work

c
r a
Notes : A requirement for rebuild Work Orders that are created automatically via a
material transaction is that the completion subinventory must be an expense

O subinventory.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 51
36. A rebuild Work Order's owning department defaults from the owning department of its
parent Work Order. This is viewable if you select the Main tab.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders
> Rebuild Work Orders

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 52
Defining Work Order Documents

m y
d e
ca
e A
Defining Work Order Documents

c l
You can attach existing documents to a Work Order, and create text to associate with a Work

r a
Order. You can attach text and files, such as spreadsheets, graphics, and OLE objects.
To define Work Order documents:
O ly
1. Navigate to the EAM Work Order Documents window.
2. Select a Data Type.
l & On
n a e
3. If the Data Type is File, attach the appropriate file. If the Data Type is Web Page, enter
the relevant URL. If the Data Type is Short Text, insert the text in the Text field.

e r s
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
t U
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management > eAM Work Orders

I n
> Defining Work Order Documents

c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 53
Agenda

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 54
Operations and Tasks

m y
d e
ca
e A
eAM Operations and Tasks

c l
Operations on a Work Order are the instructions or tasks to perform a repair. These operations

r a
are assigned resources, for example, trades people, outside service providers, and equipment.

O ly
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management >
eAM Operations and Tasks

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 55
Operations and Tasks

m y
d e
ca
e A
Preparing Work Order Operations

c l
Operations (also known as tasks) are the instructions to perform maintenance activities. Each

r a
operation is assigned to a department, associated with assigned resources (trades people,
outside service providers, and equipment). When you create a Work Order for an Asset
O ly
Number, you can attach the Asset Number's associated Activity to that Work Order, bringing

l & On
its related maintenance route and BOM. The maintenance route is comprised of operations
necessary to complete the Activity. You can view and update these operations from the Work
Order.

n a e
To prepare operations:

t e r U s
1. Navigate to the Select Work Order window.

I n
2. Choose a Work Order.
3. Choose Continue. Operations can be scheduled to run in parallel, sequence, or through

l e
dependent steps.

c
4. Choose the Operation icon, then click the header to display the New Operation window.

r a
Enter or update an Operation sequence, or let it generate for you, according to your

O profile setup. Operations are assigned in increments of ten, enabling you to later insert
additional steps.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 56
Enter a Description for this operation.
Copy or reference standard operations into a routing, select an Operation Code. If you use
a standard operation code, the operation information for that code is copied into the
current operation. You can then update that information.
Select an Assigned Department. The assigned department identifies the role responsible
for performing the task.
Select a scheduled Start Date for this operation to base on a forward schedule. The
Enterprise Asset Management scheduling process uses the scheduled start date as a
starting point to calculate the duration of the operation, based on the resources and
material. If the material and resources are not available by this date, the scheduling
process moves the start date of the Work Order forward. The planning process uses the
scheduled start date to recommend creation of purchase orders for the material.
Select a scheduled Completion date for this operation to base on a backward schedule.
The Enterprise Asset Management scheduling process uses the scheduled end date as a
starting point to calculate the duration of the operation, based on the resources and
material. If the material and resources are not available by this date, the scheduling
process moves the completion date of the Work Order backward. The planning process
uses the scheduled completion date to recommend creation of purchase orders for the
material.
- Actual dates are entered at operation and Work Order completion. Scheduled dates
are calculated by the Enterprise Asset Management scheduler if you have Oracle
Manufacturing Scheduling enabled. Otherwise, the WIP scheduler calculates the
dates.
m y
Select a Shutdown Type to help the planner group Work Orders that may require
d e
shutdowns. When the Work Orders are grouped, they are planned together.
Choose OK to return to the Operations window. The operations entered in the previous
ca
window display at the bottom of this window.

e
- Scroll over to the far right field. The Duration identifies the duration of the A
c l
operation and is measured in hours. You can manually enter this, or let it calculate

r a
as the difference between the estimated Start Date and estimated End Date.
5. After all necessary operations are entered, you can create dependencies as necessary.

O ly
Choose the Connect icon to connect dependent operations. After chosen, you can draw a

& On
line between dependent operations.

l
You might need to move operations around. Choose the Drag icon to move an operation.

a e
6. Choose Dependencies to set dependencies between operations. For example, Operation

r n s
30 is dependent on Operation 10 completing.

t e U
7. Choose Materials to view or update the associated items list for the current operation.

n
8. Choose Resources to view or update the resources assigned to the current operation.
I
If you select the Scheduling tab, for each resource operation, you can choose if it is

e
c l
included in scheduling. You can schedule at the resource level within an operation.
- Select Yes or No from the Scheduled list of values.

r a
You can view Work Order operations in a view-only mode.

OViewing Work Order Operations

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 57
You can view the operations required to perform a repair. These operations are assigned
resources (trades people, outside service providers, and equipment), as well as material. The
View Operations window does not enable you to update the operations.
To view operations:
1. Navigate to the View Operations window.
2. Within the Select Work Order window, select a Work Order.
3. Choose Continue.
4. Choose Dependencies to view operation dependency information.
5. Choose Materials to view material requirements.
6. Choose Resources to view resource assignment.
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management >
eAM Operations and Tasks

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 58
Material Requirements

m y
d e
ca
e A
Material Requirements

c l
When entering a Work Order for an Asset Number, the Asset Number's associated Activity

r a
attaches the required material and resources to complete its operations. However, you can
update, add, view, and delete material requirements for a specific Work Order.
O ly
(Help) Maintenance Applications > Oracle Enterprise Asset Management >

eAM Operations and Tasks


l & On
Enterprise Asset Management User > eAM Work Management >

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 59
Material Requirements

m y
d e
ca
e A
Defining Inventory Material Requirements

c l
When entering a Work Order for an Asset Number, the Asset Number's associated Activity

r a
attaches the required material and resources to complete its operations. However, you can
update, add, view, and delete material requirements for a specific Work Order.
O ly
To define Work Order material requirements:

& On
1. Navigate to the Select Work Order window.
l
2. Choose a Work Order.
3. Choose Continue.
n a e
e r s
4. Within the Inventory Items region, you can view or update the current Work Order's
t U
associated Asset Number's item list by placing your cursor in the Material field or by

I n
choosing Select Materials. When you choose Select Materials, the current Asset
Number's associated Asset Bill of Material items are available to add to the required

l e
material for the current Work Order.
c
r a
5. Select the Main tab to change operation sequence and the Date Required.

O
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 60
If you are accessing the Select Materials window via the Operations window, you cannot
change operation information. If you are accessing the Select Materials window via the
Work Order window, you can change operation information.
6. Select the Quantities tab to update the quantities. Required.
7. Select the Supply tab to select a supply Type.
8. Select the Comment tab to enter information for the current Material.
9. Choose the ATP tab to define available to promise information for the current material. If
you select the ATP Allowed check box, available to promise information can calculate
for the current material.
10. Choose Check ATP to check available to promise information for the selected material.
11. Choose Direct Item to create requisitions for direct items, and add them to your items list.
Oracle Self Service Purchasing defaults the Work Order Number and Operation Number,
as well as the class code information for correct expensing. Direct Items are one time,
non-inventoried items that are purchased directly from the supplier. After you choose
Direct Item, the current Work Order and operation reference values are passed to the
requisition created. If the Work Order is project related, the project and task information
is captured in the purchase requisition. You can exit Self Service Purchasing and return to
the Material Requirements window by choosing Return To Portal. Upon re-inquiry of this
Work Order, the Direct Items region reflects any requisition and purchase order details.
You must have Oracle Self Service Purchasing installed for this functionality. You can
purchase direct items from a Requisition or Purchase Order window if you have Oracle
Purchasing installed.
m y
You can procure direct items to Work Orders at Released statuses.
12. Choose Copy to Asset to dynamically update the BOM associated to the Asset Group
d e
with any items list changes.
ca
13. Save your work.
Defining Direct Item Material Requirements
e A
c l
Direct Items represent items with infrequent use or criticality; they are not included in the

r a
internal catalog as stocked items. These items are considered as "one off", bought directly from
a vendor for a specific Work Order and Operation. These items are delivered directly to the

O ly
Shop Floor for maintenance Work Order execution.
To set up Non-Stock Direct Items, access the Master Item window within Oracle Inventory,

l & On
and set up the item with the Stockable check box cleared. Description Based Direct Items are

n a e
not set up within Oracle Inventory.
You can add Non-Stock Based Direct Items to Asset, Maintenance, and Rebuildable Bills of

t e r U s
Material, but you can add Non-Stock and Description Based Direct Items directly to the
material requirements for an existing Work Order.

I n
If direct items exist on an Activity Bill of Material, they default as material requirements when
creating a Work Order for that activity. However, you can add additional direct item material

l e
requirements to an existing Work Order.

c
r a
To add direct item material requirements:
1. Navigate to the Select Work Order window.

O 2. Choose a Work Order.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

eAM Work Management


Chapter 4 - Page 61
3. Choose Continue.
4. Within the Create Direct Items region, select an Operation.
5. Select an Item Type.
Description Based Item: This direct item type is not stored in Oracle Inventory.
Non Stock Item: This direct item type is stored in Oracle Inventory. Its Master Item
record's Stockable check box is cleared.
6. If you selected a Non Stock Item Type, select an Item. This field is disabled if a
Description Based Item Type was previously selected.
7. Enter a Description, if you previously selected a Description Based Item Type.
8. Select a UOM. If you previously selected a Non Stock Item Type, this value defaults
from the Master Item.
9. Select a Purchasing Category.
10. Enter a Need By Date. The system date defaults.
11. Save your work.
Viewing Material Requirements
When you enter a Work Order for an Asset Number, the Work Order's associated Activity
attaches the required material and resources to complete its operations. You can view material
requirements for a specific Work Order.
To view Work Order material requirements:
1. Navigate to the View Material Requirements window.